JP7154768B2 - game device - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming device provided corresponding to a gaming machine.

At amusement parlors (stores) where games can be played using amusement machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, game devices such as card units are generally installed in correspondence with these amusement machines. .

As an invention relating to this gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses an invention relating to a card unit that can be used in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, parrots, and credit slot machines.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-292076

When a gaming device such as the card unit described above is provided in correspondence with a gaming machine, appropriate processing can be executed according to the type of the gaming machine to enable the game to be played on the corresponding gaming machine. It is necessary to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately registering the type of corresponding game machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention employs the following means. Note that the reference numerals used in the description of the embodiments for carrying out the invention and the drawings, which will be described later, are added for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to those with these numerals.

The invention according to means 1A is
A gaming device (CU3, etc.) provided corresponding to a gaming machine (managed gaming machine/unmanaged gaming machine, etc.),
Common to different types of gaming machines (managed pachinko machines (first managed gaming machines) / managed slot machines (second managed gaming machines) / other managed gaming machines (third managed gaming machines), etc.) It is possible to use
capable of communicating with a management device that manages information about gaming machines;
Registering means (CU control unit 323, CU storage unit 3231: gaming machine specific table 3244 in FIG. 76 unit setting registration data 3248, game model registration processing in FIG. 78, second game model registration processing in FIG. 85, etc.),
The registration means
Based on the information output from the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to acquire and register the type of the corresponding gaming machine from the management device ,
For gaming machines with different types of game media used for games, it is possible to acquire and register the corresponding gaming machine types from the management device.
This game device is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to appropriately register the type of corresponding gaming machine.

Further, as an invention according to means 2A,
The game device described in means 1A,
The registration means registers the type of the corresponding gaming machine using specific gaming machine information (game machine installation information: chip ID information, game model-specific information, model information, etc.) transmitted from the gaming machine as the external information. ,
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, based on the specific gaming machine information transmitted from the gaming machine, the type of corresponding gaming machine can be easily and appropriately registered.

Further, as an invention according to means 3A,
The game device described in means 1A or 2A,
The registration means registers the setting information (game machine setting information, model setting information, etc.) related to the type of gaming machine transmitted from the management device (information distribution server 901, ball management server 902, hall server 801, etc.) as the external information. to register the type of gaming machine that supports it,
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, it is possible to easily and appropriately register the type of corresponding gaming machine based on the setting information transmitted from the management device.

Further, as an invention according to means 4A,
A game device according to any one of means 1A to 3A,
A game capable of executing a game enablement process (lending process, replaying points process, replaying points replay process, lending information external notification process, liquid crystal unit display setting process, etc.) for enabling a game on the gaming machine Further comprising enabling processing means (CU control unit 323, etc.),
The game enablement processing means is capable of executing different game enablement processes according to the type of gaming machine registered by the registration means.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, it is possible to execute appropriate game enabling processing according to the type of gaming machine registered by the registration means.

Further, as an invention according to means 5A,
The game device described in means 4A,
In the game enabling process, a game value (game medium) owned by a player who plays a game on the gaming machine (gaming medium: stored balls/medals, game medium: held balls/medals, etc.) ) is usable in the gaming machine, and includes a game enabling process that differs according to the unit price of the gaming value (lending rate, etc.),
The game enablement processing means is capable of executing a game enablement process corresponding to the unit price of the game value that can be specified from unit price information (rate information, etc.) transmitted from the management device.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, appropriate game enabling processing can be executed according to the unit price of the game value used for the game in the corresponding gaming machine based on the unit price information transmitted from the management device.

Further, as the invention described in means 6A,
The game device described in means 4A or 5A,
In the game enabling process, a game value (game medium) owned by a player who plays a game on the gaming machine (gaming medium: stored balls/medals, game medium: held balls/medals, etc.) ) is usable in the gaming machine, and includes a game enabling process that differs according to the unit price of the game value,
An entry processing means (CU) capable of executing processing (entry processing, etc.) concerning entry for making owned gaming value of another unit price different from the one unit price owned by the player available for playing in the game machine control unit 323, etc.);
Based on the boarding setting information (boarding setting information 9026, etc.) transmitted from the management device (ball management server 902, etc.) capable of performing settings related to boarding, boarding permission determination means ( CU control unit 323, etc.),
further comprising
The game enablement processing means is capable of executing the game enablement process based on the result of determination by the boarding possibility determination means.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to allow entry based on the entry setting information transmitted from the management device, and then execute the game enabling process.

Further, as an invention according to means 7A,
The game device described in means 6A,
The registration means registers types of corresponding gaming machines (managed pachinko machines/managed slot machines, etc.) with different types of game media (pachinko balls, medals, etc.) used for games,
The game enabling processing means executes different game enabling processing for gaming machines of different types using the game media,
The boarding possibility determination means determines whether the boarding is possible between gaming machines of different types using the game media.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately register the corresponding types of gaming machines for different types of gaming machines that use different game media for games. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the game machine can be entered, targeting game machines of different types with different game media.

Further, as an invention according to means 8A,
A game device (CU3, liquid crystal unit 500, etc.) according to any one of means 1A to 7A,
A game value (game medium: pachinko balls, medals, etc.) used in a game on a game machine, and a unit of game value corresponding to the type of game machine registered by the registration means (pachinko balls: balls, medals, etc.) : sheet, etc.) unit display means (liquid crystal unit 500: liquid crystal display 504, CU3: CU display unit, etc.),
You may configure a game device characterized by further comprising
According to this, based on the registered type of gaming machine, the unit of game value to be used for the game in the corresponding gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the player.

Further, as an invention according to means 1B,
A gaming device capable of receiving gaming information from a gaming machine,
a storage unit (CU storage unit 3231, etc.) capable of storing gaming machine identification information (machine number 3237, etc.) capable of identifying a gaming machine;
Aggregation processing means (CU control unit 323, etc.) capable of executing aggregation processing (such as A3 in FIG. 47) based on the received gaming information;
Based on the change in the gaming machine identification information stored in the storage means (K1→K3 in FIG. 58; Yes, etc.), the initialization process (K5 in FIG. ) and an initialization processing means (CU control unit 323, etc.) capable of executing
You may configure a game device characterized by comprising
According to this, even if the gaming machine identification information is changed due to the transfer of the gaming device, it is possible to appropriately manage the counting result.

Further, as an invention according to means 2B,
The gaming device described in means 1B,
A display control device configured to be connectable to its own device, capable of storing aggregated information (game information accumulated data 5025, etc.) obtained by aggregating game information, and capable of displaying and controlling a predetermined display device (liquid crystal unit 500, call lamp 1000, etc.) further comprising acquisition means (CU control unit 323, etc.) capable of acquiring information from (liquid crystal unit control unit 502, liquid crystal display control unit 503, display control unit of call lamp 1000, etc.),
The acquisition means acquires the latest total information from the display control device when the initialization processing is executed by the initialization processing means (K7 in FIG. 58, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, even if the tally result is initialized by relocating the gaming device, by acquiring the latest tally information from the display control device, the game information of the gaming machine of the relocation destination can be obtained. Aggregate results can be managed.

Further, as an invention according to means 3B,
The game device described in means 1B or 2B,
The aggregation processing means executes aggregation processing based on the received gaming information, using the aggregation information acquired by the acquisition means as reference information.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, when the tally result is initialized by relocating the game device, the latest tally information obtained from the display control device is used as the reference information, and the game information received from the new gaming machine is used as the reference information. It is possible to execute tallying processing and manage the tallying results related to the gaming machine.

Further, as an invention according to means 4B,
A game device according to any one of means 1B to 3B,
First information corresponding to the received game information (external transmission data: game information itself, part of the game information, etc.) and second information corresponding to the result of the counting process (game information cumulative value, etc.) (External transmission data: recovery information, etc.) can be transmitted to external devices (management computer 900, call lamp 1000, relay device 1200, etc.) (A5 in FIG. 47, etc.). A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, by transmitting the first information corresponding to the game information received from the gaming machine and the second information corresponding to the result of counting by counting processing based on the received game information to the external device, information management is performed in the external device. can be performed appropriately.

The invention according to means 5B is
A gaming device (such as CU3) capable of receiving gaming information (such as gaming information included in gaming machine data) from a gaming machine,
Aggregation processing means (CU control unit 323, etc.) capable of executing aggregation processing (such as A3 in FIG. 47) based on the received gaming information;
First information corresponding to the received game information (external transmission data: game information itself, part of the game information, etc.) and second information corresponding to the result of the counting process (game information cumulative value, etc.) Transmission means (serial communication unit 334, etc.) capable of transmitting (external transmission data: recovery information, etc.) to external devices (management computer 900, call lamp 1000, relay device 1200, etc.) (A5 in FIG. 47, etc.);
A game device characterized by comprising:
According to this, by transmitting the first information corresponding to the game information received from the gaming machine and the second information corresponding to the result of counting by counting processing based on the received game information to the external device, information management is performed in the external device. can be performed appropriately.

Further, as an invention according to means 6B,
The game device described in means 5B,
Receive game information from a game machine at a predetermined cycle (200 ms, etc.),
The tally processing means executes the tally processing every time game information is received (A3→A7; No→A3, etc. in FIG. 47),
The transmitting means may constitute a game device characterized by transmitting information (A5→A7; No→A5, etc. in FIG. 47) at the same cycle (200 ms, etc.) as the predetermined cycle.
According to this, the information can be periodically transmitted from the gaming device to the external device in the same cycle as the cycle of receiving the game information from the gaming machine.

Further, as an invention according to means 7B,
The gaming device described in means 5B or 6B,
The transmission means is characterized in that it transmits information (increase data transfer speed, reduce data amount, etc.) so that a delay in information transmission for the processing time (FIG. 44: αms, etc.) of the aggregation process can be adjusted. You may constitute the game device which assumes.
According to this, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency by adjusting the delay of information transmission for the processing time of the aggregation process.

Further, as an invention according to means 8B,
The game device described in means 7B,
The timing at which information transmission is completed during non-adjustment is defined as the first timing (such as the timing of completion of transmission of external transmission data in FIG. 45),
The transmission means adjusts so that the information transmission is completed at a second timing earlier than the first timing (timing β1 ms or β2 ms earlier than the first timing in FIG. 46, etc.). may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency by adjusting so that the information transmission is completed at the second timing earlier than the first timing, which is the timing at which the information transmission is completed when the adjustment is not made.

Further, as an invention according to means 9B,
A game device according to any one of means 5B to 8B,
The transmitting means transmits information corresponding to a part of the information included in the received game information (information of low rank in the game information management table 3234 of FIG. 49: shooting information, etc.) as the first information. A game device characterized by transmission may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the information amount of the first information to be transmitted to the external device.

Further, as an invention according to means 10B,
A game device according to any one of means 5B to 9B,
The aggregation processing means performs the aggregation processing on a part of the information included in the received game information (specific game information in the game information management table 3234 in FIG. 49: shooting information, error information, etc.). and run
The transmitting means transmits, as the second information, information corresponding to the result of the counting performed by the counting process for the part of the information.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, it is possible to transmit the second information by executing the counting process only for information that is highly necessary to be notified to the external device.

Further, as an invention according to means 11B,
A game device according to any one of means 5B to 10B,
a storage unit (CU storage unit 3231, etc.) capable of storing gaming machine identification information (machine number 3237, etc.) capable of identifying a gaming machine;
Based on the change in the gaming machine identification information stored in the storage means (K1→K3 in FIG. 58; Yes, etc.), the initialization process (K5 in FIG. ) and an initialization processing means (CU control unit 323, etc.) capable of executing
You may configure a game device characterized by further comprising
According to this, even if the gaming machine identification information is changed due to the transfer of the gaming device, it is possible to appropriately manage the counting result.

Further, as an invention according to means 12B,
The game device described in means 11B,
It is configured to be connectable to its own device and can store total information (game information cumulative data 5025, etc.) obtained by totaling game information (liquid crystal unit storage unit 5021, storage unit of call lamp 1000, etc.), and a predetermined display device (liquid crystal unit 500, call lamp 1000, etc.) can acquire information from a display control device (liquid crystal unit control unit 502, liquid crystal display control unit 503, display control unit of call lamp 1000, etc.) capable of acquiring information (CU control unit 323 etc.)
The acquisition means acquires total information from the display control device when the initialization processing is executed by the initialization processing means (K7 in FIG. 58, etc.);
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, even if the tally result is initialized by relocating the gaming device, by acquiring the latest tally information from the display control device, the game information of the gaming machine of the relocation destination can be obtained. Aggregate results can be managed.

Further, as an invention according to means 13B,
The game device described in means 12B,
The aggregation processing means executes aggregation processing based on the received gaming information, using the aggregation information acquired by the acquisition means as reference information.
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, when the tally result is initialized by relocating the game device, the latest tally information obtained from the display control device is used as the reference information, and the game information received from the new gaming machine is used as the reference information. It is possible to execute tallying processing and manage the tallying results related to the gaming machine.

Further, as an invention according to means 14B,
A game device according to any one of means 5B to 13B,
Control means (CU control unit 323) capable of storing received game information (CU storage unit 3231: gaming machine database 3238) and capable of executing predetermined control (general control of CU3, etc.);
The game information acquired from the control means can be stored (liquid crystal unit storage unit 5021: game information data 5024, etc.), and based on the stored game information and the game information newly acquired from the control means, a predetermined Display control means (liquid crystal unit control section 502, liquid crystal display control section 503, etc.) capable of displaying and controlling the display device (liquid crystal unit 500, etc.) of
with
The display control means controls at least part of the stored game information (game information data 5024 (machine at least part of the data) can be erased,
A gaming device characterized by the above may be constructed.
According to this, at least part of the stored game information can be erased according to a command from the host device.

The invention according to means 15B is
A gaming device (such as CU3) capable of receiving gaming information (such as gaming information included in gaming machine data) from a gaming machine,
Aggregation processing means (CU control unit 323, etc.) capable of executing aggregation processing (C11, etc. in FIG. 53) based on the received gaming information;
Transmission means (serial communication unit 334, etc.) capable of transmitting information (game information, etc.) to external devices (management computer 900, call lamp 1000, relay device 1200, etc.);
with
The transmission means is
First transmission means (such as C5 in FIG. 53) capable of transmitting first information (external transmission data: game information itself, part of the game information, etc.) corresponding to the received game information to the external device (e.g., C5 in FIG. 53) serial communication unit 334, etc.);
In response to a request (data anomaly notification, data unreceivable notification, data retransmission notification, etc.), second information (external transmission data: recovery information, etc.) a second transmission means (serial communication unit 334, etc.) capable of transmitting to the external device (C13 in FIG. 53, etc.);
having
This game device is characterized by:
According to this, by transmitting the first information corresponding to the game information received from the gaming machine to the external device, and transmitting the second information corresponding to the result of the counting process to the external device in response to a request, It is possible to appropriately manage information in the external device.

In addition, as an invention related to other means,
A gaming device (eg, CU 3 and liquid crystal unit 500) provided corresponding to the gaming machine (eg, P stand 2),
A first control means (for example, , CU control unit 323),
a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal unit 500) capable of displaying at least information about a game in a corresponding gaming machine;
In addition to controlling the operation of the display unit, it is possible to store information about the game acquired from the first control means, and based on the stored information and the information acquired from the first control means, a second control means (for example, a liquid crystal unit control section 502) capable of executing control to display information on a game played in a gaming machine on the display unit;
with
The second control means includes erasure information input means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a section for receiving a machine data clear instruction) capable of inputting erasure information (for example, a machine data clear instruction), The control means and the second control means delete at least a part of the stored game-related information based on the deletion information being input to the deletion information input means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33). Then, when the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the table data clear instruction, the game information storage table (see FIG. 34B) stored in the RAM (not shown) of the liquid crystal unit control section 502 is stored. and a game information storage table (a portion for clearing the game information stored in FIG. 34A) stored in the RAM (not shown) of the CU control unit 323. You may
According to this, the display can be initialized appropriately.

In addition, as an invention related to other means,
A game system including a game machine (for example, P machine 2) and a game device (for example, CU 3 and liquid crystal unit 500) provided corresponding to the game machine,
The game device is
A first control means (for example, a CU control unit 323) capable of performing predetermined control (for example, accepting cards and banknotes, lending game balls, etc.) and storing information related to games output from the gaming machine;
a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal unit 500) capable of displaying at least information about a game in a corresponding gaming machine;
In addition to controlling the operation of the display unit, it is possible to store information about the game acquired from the first control means, and based on the stored information and the information acquired from the first control means, a second control means (for example, a liquid crystal unit control section 502) capable of executing control to display information on a game played in a gaming machine on the display unit;
with
The second control means includes erasure information input means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion for receiving a machine data clear instruction) capable of inputting erasure information (for example, a machine data clear instruction),
The first control means and the second control means delete at least a part of the stored game-related information based on the input of the deletion information to the deletion information input means (for example, FIG. 33). As shown in , when the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the machine data clear instruction, the game information storage table (see FIG. 34B) stored in the RAM (not shown) of the liquid crystal unit control section 502 A game information storage table (a portion for clearing the game information stored in FIG. 34A) stored in the RAM (not shown) of the CU control unit 323 and stored game information. You may configure the device.
According to this, the display can be initialized appropriately.

Further, in the invention according to the above means,
The erasing is performed by the second control means before the first control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34B) on the liquid crystal unit 500 side). After clearing the stored game information, the game information stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side (see FIG. 34A) may be cleared).
According to this, by first performing erasure in the second control means to which the erasure information is input, it is possible to simplify the processing related to these erasures.

Further, in the invention according to the above means,
The second control means includes erasure request transmission means capable of transmitting a request for erasure of game-related information to the first control means (for example, as shown in FIG. Yes) includes a part) that transmits a status response command containing data to CU3,
The erasure request transmitting means retransmits the erasure request when the erasure completion notification indicating that the erasure has been completed is not received from the first control means in response to the erasure request output (for example, FIG. As indicated by 33, if the liquid crystal unit control section 502 does not receive a status request command including data indicating the table data clear status (completed) from the CU3, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 sends a status response command including data indicating the repeated table data clear instruction (yes). to CU3).
According to this, it is possible to more reliably erase the game-related information stored in the first control means.

Further, in the invention according to the above means,
The first control means transmits to the second control means a state request (for example, a state request command shown in FIG. 33) requesting transmission of information regarding the state of the second control means,
The erasure request transmitting means may transmit the erasure request as a status response (for example, status response command shown in FIG. 33) that is a response to the status request.
According to this, by transmitting the erasure request as a status response that is a response to the status request, the erasure request can be reliably received by the first control means.

Further, in the invention according to the above means,
The erase information is output from a management device that manages the game device (for example, as shown in FIG. Based on this, the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) may be cleared).
According to this, it is possible to instruct erasure of the information regarding the game in the management device.

Further, in the invention according to the above means,
The game device is
It has a plurality of signal output units (for example, external output port 1 to external output port 4), and signals of different types from each signal output unit (for example, all jackpot signals, security signals, start signals, model-specific signals, specific types) Big hit signal, small hit signal, time saving signal, number of prize balls signal, planned number of prize balls signal, special figure 1 starting entrance winning signal, special figure 2 starting entrance winning signal, door open signal, number of out signals etc.) can be output to the outside (for example, the outer end output unit 331);
Output setting information acquisition means (for example, output setting information acquisition means (for example, terminal setting data shown in FIG. 30) for acquiring output setting information (for example, terminal setting data shown in FIG. 30) from the outside (for example, ball management server 902) for the type of signal to be output from each of the signal output units For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the part where the CU control unit 323 acquires the terminal setting data from the ball management server 902),
Based on the output setting information acquired by the output setting information acquiring means, signal type setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 29, receiving A part in which the CU control unit 323 assigns and sets the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d connected to the external output ports 1 to 4 to each signal based on the terminal setting data obtained;
may be provided.
According to this, it is possible to save labor in connection work of the signal lines.

Further, in the invention according to the above means,
The display unit can display an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of an error (for example, radio wave error, fraudulent winning error, magnet error, vibration error, etc.) (for example, as shown in FIG. 27, a liquid crystal A portion that displays an error on the display 504),
The game device is
Model information receiving means for receiving model information (for example, main chip ID) stored in the corresponding game machine (for example, as shown in FIG. the part that receives the display data request command);
Error display information (for example, error display data), which is information corresponding to the model of the gaming machine and is capable of specifying an error notification display for each type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine, is associated with the model information of the gaming machine. error display information acquisition means (for example, FIG. 25, CU3 transmits an error display data request command including the main chip ID to the information distribution server 901, and an error display stored in the information distribution server 901 corresponding to the model indicated by the main chip ID is displayed. the part where the liquid crystal unit 500 acquires data);
Error occurrence information receiving means (for example, as shown in FIG. a part that receives a status request command containing amusement machine error information);
Error notification display specifying means (for example, as shown in FIG. 27) for specifying, based on the error display information, an error notification display corresponding to the type of error specified from the error occurrence information received by the error occurrence information receiving means , a part for specifying the error detected at the P machine 2 from the game machine error information received by the liquid crystal unit control unit 502);
Display control means for displaying the error notification display specified by the error notification display specifying means on the display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 27, using error display data corresponding to the error specified by the liquid crystal unit control section 502) a part for executing error display on the liquid crystal display 504);
may be provided.
According to this, it is possible to display an error notification display corresponding to the model of the gaming machine even on a gaming device outside the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the inventions described in the above means may be combined with each other to provide a game device that achieves the same effects as the corresponding means.

It is a front view showing a card unit, a liquid crystal unit and a pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the glass door and the front frame of the pachinko game machine are opened. It is a figure which shows the state before and after a game board is attached to a front frame. It is a figure which shows the system configuration|structure of the system for a game. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit used in the card unit, the liquid crystal unit and the pachinko game machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored on the card unit side and the pachinko game machine side and transmission and reception thereof. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of commands and responses that are transmitted and received between the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a state information request; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a status information response; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a status information response; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of commands transmitted and received between the card unit and the liquid crystal unit; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of a game machine connection notification command; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of a status request command; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of a status response command; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a card unit and a pachinko game machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine when a card is returned. FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between the CU status and the card insertion status included in the card insertion notification command and the status information request command; It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a card unit, a liquid crystal unit, and a pachinko game machine at the time of lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit, the liquid crystal unit, and the pachinko gaming machine when carrying out ball payout/stored ball payout. 9 is a flowchart for explaining state information request reception processing; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining types of errors that can be notified in the gaming system; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a card unit, a liquid crystal unit, and P stand. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of processing between an information distribution server and a liquid crystal unit when the information distribution server distributes content; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the CU, the liquid crystal unit, and the information distribution server when power is turned on to the CU and the liquid crystal unit; (A) is a diagram showing a model identification table, (B) is a diagram showing an error display data storage table, and (C) is a diagram showing a support data storage table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of processing in the P units, the CU, and the liquid crystal unit when an error occurs in the P units; It is a figure which shows an error storage table. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of CU and a ball management server when CU is powered on. It is a figure which shows a terminal setting data storage table. It is a figure which shows the setting screen of terminal setting data. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of CU and a liquid crystal unit after turning on a power supply to CU and a liquid crystal unit until performing stand data clear. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of CU and a liquid crystal unit after turning on a power supply to CU and a liquid crystal unit until performing stand data clear. It is a figure which shows a game information storage table. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of liquid crystal unit timer interrupt processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of screens of a variable display device and a liquid crystal display when an error occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a liquid crystal display when an error occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a liquid crystal display when an error occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where a remote controller transmits an error history display instruction signal to a CU; It is a figure in the case of displaying an error history on a liquid crystal display. _ It is a block diagram showing a control circuit used in the card unit, the liquid crystal unit and the pachinko game machine in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of external transmission data. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of a data part. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the principle of reception of gaming machine data from P machines and transmission of external transmission data from CU. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the principle of reception of gaming machine data from P machines and transmission of external transmission data from CU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of CU processing and hall server processing in a 2nd example. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of a CU memory|storage part. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for game information management. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of an external transmission data management table; It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of various external transmission data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for a unit setting. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of CU processing and hall server processing in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of call lamp processing in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a recovery method for calling lamps; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a recovery method for calling lamps; It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of a liquid crystal unit memory|storage part. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of liquid crystal unit exception processing, CU processing, and call lamp processing in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of external transmission data; It is explanatory drawing of the recovery method in the call lamp as a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for the card unit in 5th Example, a liquid crystal unit, and a management pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of inter-main-frame message data; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining each storage unit for inter-frame message data; It is a figure which shows an example of the gaming machine installation information internal notification. It is a figure which shows an example of a gaming machine installation information internal response. It is a figure which shows an example of the gaming machine information internal notification. It is a figure which shows an example of a gaming machine information internal response. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of data communication between a main control board and a frame control board; It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the electronic message data between game machine CUs. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of message|telegram data between game machine CUs. It is a figure which shows an example of the transmission pattern between game machine CU. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining data transmission between a main control board and a frame control board, data transmission between a frame control board and a CU, and data transmission between a CU and an external device; It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of a CU memory|storage part. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the game model registration table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the table for a process setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of unit setting registration data. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of second CU processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a game model registration process. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal unit; It is a figure which shows another example of the transmission pattern between game machine CUs. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the memory|storage part of a possession ball management server. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a stored game medium number management table; It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a target area setting table. It is explanatory drawing of the right or wrong of entry. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of processing of the possession ball management server and CU regarding entry. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a drive-in process. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal unit; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal unit; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal unit; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the table configuration of the process setting table; It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a CU display part.

Hereinafter, the form for carrying out the gaming machine and gaming system according to the present invention will be described below based on the embodiments. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in this embodiment, for example, "step *1" may be abbreviated as "*1".

[1. First embodiment]
First, referring to FIG. 1, the configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. On each game island (not shown) arranged in a game hall (hall), an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, pachinko machine or P machine) is an example of a game machine. ) 2 are installed. A card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3, which is an example of a game device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2 at a predetermined side position of the P table 2. there is Although a card unit will be described below as an example of a gaming device according to the present embodiment, it is not limited to this, and is connected to the P machine 2 to notify big hits and abnormalities, and to collect game information such as the number of winnings. It may be a call lamp (call lamp device) or the like.

The P table 2 encloses pachinko balls, which are an example of game media, inside, and when the player operates the ball hitting operation handle 25, the shooting motor 18 (see FIG. 5) is driven to shoot one enclosed ball. It is constructed so that a game can be played by hitting one by one into a game area 27 on the front surface of the game board 26. - 特許庁Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the ball hitting operation handle 25, and when the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the ball hitting operation handle 25, the player's hand touches the touch sensor. is detected by the touch sensor, and the ejection motor 18 is driven. In this state, the ball is shot into the game area 27 by adjusting the hitting ball shooting momentum according to the amount of rotation operation of the hitting ball operation handle 25 by the player.

The firing intensity of the pachinko balls (hereinafter simply referred to as firing intensity T) can be adjusted according to the rotational operation amount of the ball hitting operation handle 25 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the handle operation amount), and the handle operation amount is increased. The emission intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing intensity T so that the pachinko balls pass through the target area by adjusting the handle operation amount.

The P table 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type pachinko game machine, and a variable display device (also called a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27 . In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of prize winning openings through which the hit pachinko balls can win. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one big winning hole (variable winning ball device) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274, and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the starting prize-winning port 276 is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

The variable display device 278 has a variable display unit capable of variable display (also referred to as variable display) of a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and detects the starting winning balls that have won the respective starting winning openings 275, 276, and 277. Based on the signal, the variable display of the plurality of types of identification information is started. When the display result of the variable display device becomes a combination of specific identification information (for example, a square), a big win state (also called a big win game state) occurs, and a big winning opening 271 is opened. The big winning opening 271 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls (eg, 10 balls) are won, or when a predetermined time period (eg, 29 seconds) elapses. When the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 are repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times or 15 times), the big winning opening 271 is closed and the big winning state ends.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display device 278 becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of definite variable symbols such as 777) among combinations of big win symbols (slots), a definite variable big win state is obtained. is generated, and after the end of the jackpot state associated therewith, a probability change state (probability change state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved occurs.

A pachinko ball hit into the game area 27 wins a winning prize or is collected to an out port 154 without winning a prize. The pachinko balls that have won any of the winning holes and the pachinko balls that have been collected in the out hole 154 are returned to the ball shooting position through the collection path in the P platform 2 again. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting ball shooting position is hit into the game area 27 again.

The P stand 2 arranges the liquid crystal unit 500 extending from the CU3 in front of the P stand 2 by installing the CU3 at the side position. Therefore, a liquid crystal unit 500 is provided below the game area 27 on the P platform 2 . The liquid crystal unit 500 has a liquid crystal display 504, and displays various images to the player according to the number of balls held, the number of stored balls, the prepaid balance (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), or the state of the P table 2. It is displayable.

A game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is provided below the game area 27 on the P platform 2 . The game ball number display 29 is composed of a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control section 171 which will be described later. The game ball number display 29 displays the number of game balls, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like, which will be described later. Furthermore, as will be described later, when a request for addition of game balls is made despite the fact that no card is inserted into CU3, information capable of specifying the number of illegal balls to be rented is displayed on the game ball number display 29 to be displayed. Note that the game ball number display 29 is not limited to the 7-segment LED display, and may be configured with a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

Furthermore, a counting button 28 for counting the number of game balls to the balls in hand is provided on the left side of the game ball number display 29 on the P platform 2 . In this embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the length of time the counting button 28 is kept pressed. It should be noted that regardless of the pressing duration, when the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the game balls to the balls held, or when the counting button 28 is pressed once. may count all the game balls currently owned by the player regardless of the pressing time (regardless of long pressing or not). In addition, the counting speed is further improved when the card return operation is performed, realizing smooth card return processing.

Thus, since the count button 28 is provided on the P table 2 side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table 2 can be improved compared to the case where the count button 28 is provided on the CU3 side. . In addition, the P table 2 is provided with speakers 270 at upper right and upper left positions of the game area 27 for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with effects displayed on the variable display device 278 . Note that the positions and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 1, and the positions and the number may be changed as necessary.

The P table 2 according to this embodiment can be divided into a game board 26 and a front frame (game frame) 5 other than the game board 26 . In particular, the game board 26 is different for each pachinko game machine model developed by each company, while the front frame 5 is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, when a game store replaces a new machine, it is sufficient to replace only the game board 26.例文帳に追加

Next, still referring to FIG. 1, the configuration of the CU3 according to this embodiment will be described. This CU3 can be a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a game storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members, or a member player who has registered as a member of the game parlor. A member card, which is a game storage medium issued to a player, is accepted. A visitor card or a membership card is composed of an IC card.

The CU3 that has received these cards has the function of converting the game value owned by the player specified by the information stored in the card (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of accumulated balls) into "game ball data". . At the P table 2, a pinball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is enabled. In other words, the “game ball data” is data indicating the remaining number of shot balls that can be shot. In the following description, the "game ball data" is simply referred to as "game ball" as well as stored balls and owned balls.

A bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a card insertion/ejection slot 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, and the like are provided on the front side of the CU3. A card reader/writer 337 provided in the CU 3 accepts the member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion/ejection port 309, and reads the information stored in the card. The card reader/writer 337 of this embodiment has a storage unit capable of storing a predetermined number (for example, 10) of visitor cards to be used for issuance. or when the return operation is performed when there is no prepaid balance but the number of balls is present, the visitor card stored in the storage unit is ejected (issued) from the card insertion/ejection port 309 )do.

In addition, in the CU3 of the present embodiment, by detecting the operation of the replay button (replay display) displayed on the liquid crystal unit 500 via the liquid crystal display 504 (see FIG. 5), the membership card It is possible to carry out a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the ID. Although details will be described later, the liquid crystal unit 500 according to the present embodiment receives specific commands and signals from the CU 3 and the information distribution server 901, so that the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the number of probability variations, and the number of starts are displayed on the liquid crystal display 504. , display of jackpot probability, number of balls held, number of stored balls, number of game balls, base when P machine 2 is at a low base, highlighting of ball lending button, warning display when game time on P machine 2 is long, game It is possible to execute the closing notice display of the place and the like.

When the replay button is operated, if the number of balls possessed by the player is recorded in the inserted card, part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls, and based on the converted game balls It becomes possible to play a game using the P table 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of balls held is not stored and the stored balls are stored in the management computer 900 or the like, part of the stored balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls. Then, a game can be played on the P table 2.例文帳に追加In other words, when both stored balls and owned balls are stored in association with the inserted card, the owned balls are preferentially withdrawn.

Here, the "accumulated balls" are the balls that are deposited in the hall out of the balls acquired on the previous day or earlier, and become game balls when the accumulated balls are paid out. The accumulated balls are game media deposited in the game hall, and are generally managed by the management computer 900 (see FIG. 5) installed in the game hall or other management computers.

"Possessed balls" are the balls acquired on the day, and become game balls when the held balls are paid out. In addition, the number of balls held is the number of game balls that the player has owned as a result of playing the game on the P machine 2, and is the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. In general, the number of balls acquired by a player on the same day at a gaming facility is called "balls possessed", and the number of balls acquired by a player on the day before and deposited at the gaming facility is called "storage balls". To tell.

A “game ball” is a ball that can be shot from the P platform 2 . As already explained, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for the withdrawal of the prepaid card balance, owned balls, or stored balls.

The number of balls owned may be managed by a management device for managing the number of owned balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between "stored balls" and "balls in possession" is the number of balls that have been deposited in the game hall after the operation of storing balls to deposit them in the game hall, or the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls.

In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly stored in the member card, but is stored in a server installed in the game hall, such as the management computer 900, in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be retrieved based on the member card number. is configured as On the other hand, the possession ball is directly stored in the card. However, it is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801 (see FIG. 5) in association with the card number. Also in the case of the visitor card, the possession balls are directly stored in the visitor card. However, it is not limited to this, and the balls may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. When the card number is stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801 may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and ejected. In addition, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged.

The timing of storing the balls in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server 801 is, for example, every time the counting button 28 is operated and the counting process is performed, the stored balls are stored in real time at regular intervals. It is conceivable that the timing may be set to memorize the information or to collectively memorize the information when the card is returned.

In addition, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3, the balls held stored in the CU3 are temporarily stored as stored balls in the hall server 801, and the date the player receives the card is returned. When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3 again on the same day, only the balls possessed for the day once stored as stored balls are stored again in that CU3, and the game balls are added within the range of the possessed balls, and the game is played. You may make it possible.

A bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by a bill validator (not shown), and its authenticity and bill type are identified. Further, on the front side of CU3, an infrared light receiving section 324 capable of receiving infrared rays emitted from a remote controller or the like for operating the CU3 is provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 2, the P table 2 opens and closes a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with the left edge thereof as the swing center for a frame-shaped outer frame 4. provided as possible.

A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge (free end side) of the front frame 5 on the side opposite to the swing center. The engaging projections 6a and 6b are pressed downward by springs (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. As shown in FIG. By pressing the open front frame 5 against the outer frame 4, the engaging projections 6a and 6b get over the engaging receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and in the overriding state, the engaging projections 6a and 6b are downwardly urged by the biasing force of the spring. Move and lock.

Then, when the staff of the game hall inserts the key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 6b is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6a, 6b with the engagement receiving pieces 7a, 7b is released, the lock is released, and the front frame 5 is opened.

Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6 , and an engagement hole 9 is provided in a portion of the glass door 6 facing the engagement projection 8 . The engagement projection 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and when the open glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 , the engagement projection 8 is pushed up by the lower edge of the engagement hole 9 . By getting over it, the engaging projection 8 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engaging projection 8 and the engaging hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, the staff of the game hall inserts the key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. As a result, the engagement between the engagement projection 8 and the engagement hole 9 is released, the lock is released, and the glass door 6 is opened.

A front frame open detection switch 13 is provided at a portion of the lower portion of the front frame 5 that contacts the outer frame 4 to detect that the front frame 5 has been opened. A glass door open detection switch 12 is provided at the upper portion of the front frame 5 in contact with the glass door 6, and the glass door open detection switch 12 detects that the glass door 6 is opened.

The number of times the glass door open detection switch 12 and the front frame open detection switch 13 are opened is counted by a counter (not shown). The counting counter is equipped with a CPU (Central Processing Unit), ROM (Read Only Memory), RAM (Random Access Memory), etc., and can operate with a backup power supply even when the power supply to the P unit 2 is interrupted. Even when the power is off, the number of open detection times of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 can be counted and the counted value can be transmitted to the payout control section 171 . Here, the backup power supply is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P-table 2 .

A main control board 16 is provided on the back surface of the game board 26 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4 is closed, the main control board 16 becomes detachable from the game board 26 by first opening the front frame 5 and removing the game board 26 from the front frame 5 . That is, in order to remove the main control board 16 from the game board 26 or to replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16, the front frame 5 must be opened. The work can always be detected. Therefore, if the main control board 16 is illegally removed from the game board 26 or if the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16 is illegally replaced, the front frame open detection switch 13 can always detect it.

Furthermore, a payout control board 17 is provided on the rear surface of the front frame 5 . The payout control board 17 also needs to be removed from the rear surface of the front frame 5 after the front frame 5 is first opened. Therefore, if the payout control board 17 is illegally removed from the rear surface of the front frame 5, or if the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17 is illegally replaced, the front frame open detection switch 13 can always detect it.

Next, a configuration for installing the game board 26 on the front frame 5 will be described. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing states before and after the game board 26 is attached to the front frame 5. FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, mounting mechanisms 34a and 34b are provided on the rear surface of the front frame 5 so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35a and 35b, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b are U-shaped and have a bottom width corresponding to the game board 26. - 特許庁By pushing the game board 26 into the front frame 5 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 3(b), the game board 26 is fixed by the mounting mechanisms 34a and 34b as shown in FIG. 3(a). When the game board 26 is fixed by the mounting mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side is coupled with the concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are floating connectors having flexibility against misalignment.

Further, when the game board 26 is installed on the front frame 5, the convex drawer connector 32 is coupled with the concave drawer connector 33 so that the main control board 16 on the game board 26 side and the payout control board on the front frame 5 side are connected. 17 will be connected. Furthermore, since the game board 26 is fixed in a fixed position and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 have flexibility against positional deviation to some extent, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer These can be combined without being conscious of the positional relationship with the connector 33 . Even if the game board 26 is installed on the front frame 5 only with the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 without the mounting mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 may be used. Since the floating connector itself has flexibility, the game board 26 and the front frame 5 can be connected without being conscious of their positional relationship. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 is connected to the main control board 16 via the internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26, and the concave drawer connector 33 is connected via the signal cable 36 to the payout shown in FIG. It is connected to the control board 17 .

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a control circuit used for CU3 and P-table 2. As shown in FIG. The outline of the control circuit of the CU 3, the P stand 2 and the liquid crystal unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

The CU3 is provided with a CU control board 320, and the CU control board 320 is provided with a CU control section 323 constituted by a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 is the main control function unit of the CU 3, and includes a CPU as a control center, a ROM that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU, peripheral An input/output interface and the like are provided to maintain signal consistency with equipment. The ROM in the CU control unit 323 stores in advance the data of the unit number of the P unit 2 to which the CU3 is provided.

The CU control board 320 also includes an information distribution server 901, a ball management server 902, a content management server 903, and a T-BOX 904 (see FIG. 4. "T-BOX" is a terminal box (for sales management). abbreviated name) and a first LAN communication unit 328 for communicating using a local area network, a management computer 900 and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 6) that performs security management, and a local area network (LAN). and a call lamp communication unit 327 for communicating with a call lamp 1000, which will be described later. A security board (SC board) 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the P table 2 while ensuring security is connected to the CU control unit 323 . Security board 325 is the security monitoring function unit of CU3. Note that the CU control unit 323 may be provided on the security board 325, or the CU control unit 323 may be provided on a board different from the security board 325. FIG. The CU3 is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the side of the P table 2, and the P table 2 is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the side of the CU3. These connecting portions are configured by connectors, for example.

The security board 325 on the CU3 side and the payout control board 17 on the P stand 2 side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the P table 2. Further, the SC 325b is provided with a fraud detection unit (not shown) inside, and the fraud detection unit detects fraud by monitoring the addition request information of game balls notified from the CU control unit 323 to the P machine 2. The key management server 800 (see FIG. 6) is notified at this time. A set value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

In addition, the CU3 of this embodiment includes an RTC (real time clock) 330 capable of measuring date and time, and an outer end output unit for outputting a signal from the CU3 (more specifically, the CU control unit 323) to the outside. 331 , a command transmission/reception unit 335 for transmitting/receiving commands (data) between the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 is provided. It is

The outer end output section 331 is provided with an external output circuit 332 that performs control for outputting the signal from the CU 3 to the outside, and external output ports 1 to 4 connected to the external output circuit 332 . Furthermore, one of the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d is connected to each of the external output ports 1-4. That is, by connecting the input terminals of an external device to these first terminal 333a to fourth terminal 333d, signals from CU3 can be output to the outside. In this embodiment, the external device to which the signal from the CU3 is output via the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d is, for example, game information on the P machine 2 (for example, the number of errors, etc.), a hall server 801, and a call lamp 1000 capable of displaying at least a part of game information such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts on the P platform 2, and the like.

The liquid crystal unit 500 is provided with a liquid crystal control board 501, and the liquid crystal control board 501 is provided with a liquid crystal unit control section 502 composed of a microcomputer or the like. Further, the liquid crystal control board 501 includes a liquid crystal display control section 503 for controlling image display on the liquid crystal display 504 provided in the liquid crystal unit 500, an information distribution server 901 (see FIG. 4), and a local area network (see FIG. 4). A LAN communication unit 505 for performing communication using a LAN) and an RTC (real time clock) 507 capable of measuring date and time are provided. The liquid crystal unit 500 is also provided with a command transmitting/receiving section 506 for transmitting/receiving commands (data) between the liquid crystal unit 500 and the CU3. Incidentally, the liquid crystal display device 504 in this embodiment has a touch panel, and the operation of the player or the like can be detected by the touch panel.

The CU control unit 323 is supplied with the identification result signal after identification of the bill's authenticity and type by the above-described currency identification device. Further, when the infrared light receiving portion 324 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote control possessed by a staff member of the game arcade, the received light signal is input to the CU control portion 323 . A card reader/writer 337 reads the stored information of the inserted card and inputs the read information to the CU control unit 323 . When the data to be written is transmitted, the card reader/writer 337 writes the data to the inserted card. The information stored in the card includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader/writer 337 until the game ends.

The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the balls possessed by the player while the player is playing. Data such as the balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the liquid crystal display control unit 503 converts it into display data.

Also, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display 504 , the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the liquid crystal display control unit 503 , the command transmission/reception unit 506 and the command transmission/reception unit 335 . be done. That is, in this embodiment, the player operates the ball lending button (ball lending display), the replay button (replay display), the card return button (card return display), etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display 504. By detecting this with the touch panel, operation signals for these operations are input to the CU control unit 323 .

The P machine 2 has a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game on the P machine 2, a payout control board 17 that manages and stores game balls, and a firing motor 18 that is driven and controlled based on commands from the payout control board 17. , a variable display device 278, and an effect control board 15 for controlling the display of the variable display device 278 based on commands transmitted from the main control board 16 are provided.

The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26 . The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer, which is the main control section 161 . The main control section 161 is the main control function section of the gaming machine. The game machine control microcomputer consists of the CPU as the control center, the ROM that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, the RAM that functions as the work area for the CPU, and maintains signal consistency with peripheral devices. An input/output interface and the like are provided for this purpose. The main control unit 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162, a radio wave sensor 163, a vibration sensor 164, and a magnetic sensor 165 provided on the game board .

The main control unit 161 selects a random number for determining a big win (or a small win)/losing when a ball wins a prize in each of the start winning holes 275, 276 and 277, and stores the random number. This is called reserved memory. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, "4". When the variable display device 278 becomes ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 consumes one reserved memory, performs a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the start of the variable display. The variable display time up to the point is determined from among a plurality of types. Moreover, when a big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not to generate a probability variation. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the big hit determination (including whether or not to change probability) and the information on the variable display time to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15 as a command.

Commands related to the variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 include a variable start command indicating the start of the variable display, a display result command (big hit/lost) indicating the result of the variable display, and a variable display pattern. It includes a possible variable display time command, a variable stop command indicating the timing for deriving and displaying the variable display result, and the like. Furthermore, the commands sent from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 include a command that can identify the progress of the big win during the big win, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new pending memory, and a command that indicates the occurrence of an error in the game state. There are commands to show

The effect control section 151 determines the variable display contents of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control section 161 . For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies the variable display result and the variable display time based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines the stop pattern, and determines the variable display pattern (whether or not there is reach, the type of reach). is determined, and furthermore, the effect pattern of the advance notice effect related to the big hit and reach is determined. The effect control unit 151 controls the display of the variable display device 278 according to the determined variable display content.

The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 5 . The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer, which is a payout control unit 171 . The payout control unit 171 is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer has a CPU as the control center, a ROM that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU, and maintains signal consistency with peripheral devices. An input/output interface and the like are provided for this purpose.

Also, a shot ball detection switch 703, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33A, a counting button 28, and a radio wave sensor 173 are electrically connected to the payout control board 17. FIG. This radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly keeping the doffing switch (upper) 41a in the ON state. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 through an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17 . The ball-up switch (upper) 41a detects the shooting of game balls by changing from ON to OFF, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts "1" from the number of game balls.

Therefore, when the ball-up switch (upper) 41a is always on due to illegal radio waves, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. The radio wave sensor 173 detects such fraud by radio waves.

From the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbol determination, jackpot information, model specific Jackpot information is sent.

The main control chip ID (also called main chip ID) is a chip ID stored in the main control board 16 of the P table 2, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the P table 2 is powered on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, big winning opening) and the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls when game balls enter the winning opening). It is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the table 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when the jackpot is won, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P table 2 is turned on.

The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected. A signal of a predetermined voltage is always supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. The payout control board 17 that has received this detection signal performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of additional balls.

The starting winning hole winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won in one of the starting winning holes. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 to that effect when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

The number of design determinations is information about the design determined as the display result of the variable display device with respect to the winning to each start winning opening.

The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and includes common jackpot information indicating jackpots common to manufacturers and model-specific jackpot information indicating model-specific jackpots. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly adopted by game machine manufacturers, such as a 15-round jackpot, for example. When a time-saving state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-saving information is included. The machine-specific jackpot is a jackpot state that is used only by a certain machine model, such as a sudden change in probability or a jackpot controlled according to the passage of a game ball through a specific area. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving state may be referred to as a high base state (or simply high base).

A health check command and a prize ball number reception command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16 . A health check command is a command for checking whether the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the number of additional balls has been accepted.

An out-ball detection signal is input from the out-ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17 . The payout control board 17 to which the out-ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of balls in play (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as described later. When the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33A, the payout control board 17 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of game balls, and subtracts and updates the number of playing balls, as will be described later. A shot ball detection signal is input from the shot ball detection switch 703 to the payout control board 17 . The payout control board 17 to which this shooting ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

The security board 325 of the CU3 and the payout control board 17 of the P table 2 are electrically connected via the command communication unit 180 provided in the game frame (front frame) 17 and the PIF circuit 326 provided in the CU3. Various commands are transmitted from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 as will be described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325 as will be described later.

In addition to the payout control board 17, the front frame 5 is provided with a launch control board 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number indicator 29. - 特許庁Although the game ball number display 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 5, it may be attached to the front frame 5 like the upper and lower trays provided on the front side of an ordinary pachinko game machine from which balls are paid out. It may be provided in a rotatable manner. This point also applies to the liquid crystal unit 500 . The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29 .

A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the payout control board 17 to the firing control board 31 . The firing control board 31 receiving it outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 18 of the launcher. As a result, the pachinko balls are shot to the game area 27 . The shooting control board 31 emits a shooting motor excitation output to drive the shooting motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player touches the ball hitting operation handle 25 is input. Also, the firing intensity sensor 19 and the firing stop switch 20 are connected to the firing control board 31 .

A shooting intensity sensor 19 detects the shooting intensity T of the pachinko balls by the shooting motor 18 . For example, the firing intensity sensor 19 detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor whose electrical resistance value is configured to change according to the steering wheel operation amount into a digital value. In the following description, it is assumed that the firing intensity T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the steering wheel operation amount. The detection result of the firing intensity sensor 19 is output to the payout control board 17 and CU3 via the firing control board 31 .

The shooting stop switch 20 is a switch for stopping the shooting of game balls by the shooting motor 18, and is provided on a ball hitting operation handle 25 so as to be operable by the player. When the firing stop switch 20 is operated (turned ON), the firing control board 31 detects that the firing stop switch 20 has been operated, and regardless of the amount of operation of the hitting operation handle 25 (firing strength T by the firing strength sensor 19). First, the shooting of game balls by the shooting motor 18 is stopped.

The liquid crystal unit 500 receives display data (display control signal) from the CU 3 via the command transmission/reception units 335 and 506 .

The RAM clear switch 293 is a switch for erasing the gaming machine information and game information stored in the RAM of the P machine 2. After the P machine is in an error state, the switch is operated by the clerk to clear the initial state. state can be restored. This RAM clear switch 293 is operated by a store clerk, for example, after the card is ejected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 1 and 5, the circulation path of pachinko balls on the P table 2 will be outlined. When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the shooting motor 18 is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the shooting position is shot by the hitting ball hammer and hit into the game area 27. - 特許庁

The game ball launch detection is detected when the ball-up switch (upper) 41a changes from on to off. This detection is detected by port input in the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 5) provided with the payout control unit 171, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts "1" from the number of game balls. do.

Of the balls hit into the game area 27, the out balls that enter the out port 154 (see FIG. 1) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by the out ball detection switch 701 provided on the way. . The foul ball flows down through the foul ball return path and is detected by the foul ball detection switch 33A provided on the way.

All the winning balls that have entered the winning opening or the variable winning ball device are collected at the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collected ball passage path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collected ball passage path. A shot ball detection switch 703 is provided in the collected ball passage path. Therefore, all winning balls, out balls, and foul balls are detected by the shot ball detection switch 703 . In other words, the projectile ball detection switch 703 is a switch that detects all of the shot pachinko balls. When the number detected by the switch and the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the shooting motor 18 become equal, it can be determined that all the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference between the number of shots detected by the shot ball detection switch 703 and the number of shots is calculated. I have decided not. By making this determination, it can be determined whether or not there is a floating ball that is rolling in the game area 27 or is caught between nails or the like in the game area and is not falling.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 4, the P unit 2 is communicably connected to the CU3. The CU3 is also communicatively connected to a call lamp 1000 provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each P machine 2 in the game arcade. In addition, the call lamp 1000 in this embodiment can update and display the number of jackpots, the number of probability variations, the number of starts and the number of balls on the P table 2 to which the CU3 is connected by receiving the signal output from the CU3. It's becoming Further, CU3 is communicably connected to management computer 900 and hall server 801 via HUB (concentrator) 1001, and via HUB (concentrator) 1002, information distribution server 901, ball management server 902 and The information distribution server 901 connected to the T-BOX 904 is a server for mainly distributing content data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 to the liquid crystal unit 500 . The ball management server 902 manages the number of balls owned by a player (member player) who has a membership card so that they can be used for another game, and the number of balls recorded in each visitor card and member card. It is a server for doing.

The T-BOX 904 is a controller that manages visitor cards and membership cards used in CU3 and CU3. The T-BOX 904 of this embodiment manages the prepaid balance (gaming value) remaining in each member card and each visitor card, and manages these member cards and visitor cards via the communication line 11. is connected to a payment server 905 installed in a card management company outside the game hall so that data communication can be performed, and various management information is sent from T-BOX 904 to these payment servers 905 The card management company can grasp the sales of the member cards and visitor cards of each game arcade through the settlement server 905 .

Next, the visitor card and the member card used in this embodiment will be briefly described. The visitor card and the member card used in this embodiment have a non-volatile memory for storing various data. and an IC card equipped with an IC chip having a control unit that rewrites and reads the recorded information and performs non-contact communication with an external reader/writer device. Each member card has a card ID that can identify each card, more specifically, a visitor card has a card ID beginning with VC, and a member card has a membership card ID beginning with KC stored in advance in a non-rewritable manner. The type of card can be identified from the card ID, and prepaid balance data that can specify the prepaid balance is stored.

The membership card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member of the game arcade, and stores a member ID given to the member in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, as will be described later, the member player can use the member card to accumulate the game balls that have been obtained and counted so that they can be used again in the next day or later. However, the number of stored balls, which is the data of the stored balls, and the number of held balls, which is the data of the balls held, are not directly stored in these membership cards. By being stored in association with the member ID, it is specified from the member card ID or the member ID.

The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing/receiving machine (not shown) installed in the game arcade, and is also issued by CU3. The visitor card stores the number of possessed balls based on the counted number of balls (the number of acquired game media) counted by the player who owns the visitor card and the date. can be used in each CU3 in the game hall.

Also, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of balls held is written and recorded only on the visitor card, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls held may be identified from the card ID without storing the number of balls held.

When the player inserts a visitor card or a membership card into the card insertion/ejection port 309, the CU control unit 323 outputs the (membership) card ID, the membership ID (membership card only), and the prepaid card of the membership card or visitor card. Reads balance data, ball number data (visitor card only), etc. Then, the CU control unit 323 transmits to the T-BOX 904 an authentication request including the (membership) card ID read from the accepted membership card or visitor card, the prepaid balance data, and the device ID.

T-BOX 904 checks whether the received card ID is stored in the member card table or the visitor card table stored in advance in the T-BOX 904, and whether or not the prepaid balance specified from the received prepaid balance data is stored in the T-BOX 904. It is determined whether or not it matches the stored prepaid balance, and whether or not the inserted visitor card or membership card is to be authenticated. If the received card ID is stored in the member card table or the visitor card table stored in advance in the T-BOX 904, or if the prepaid balance specified from the received prepaid balance data is stored in the T-BOX 904 If the balance matches the balance, the T-BOX 904 transmits a command indicating that the inserted visitor card or membership card has been authenticated to the CU control unit 323, and the received card ID is sent to the T-BOX 904 in advance. If it is not stored in the stored member card table or visitor card table, or if the prepaid balance specified from the received prepaid balance data does not match the prepaid balance stored in T-BOX 904, T-BOX 904 , a command indicating that the inserted visitor card or membership card is not to be authenticated is transmitted to the CU control unit 323 .

When the CU control unit 323 receives a command to authenticate the inserted visitor card or membership card from the T-BOX 904, the CU control unit 323 transmits a card acceptance notification to the ball management server 902 to check the balls and stored balls. When a command to authenticate the inserted visitor card or membership card is received from the T-BOX 904, the inserted visitor card or membership card is ejected from the card insertion/ejection port 309.

The hall server 801 is further communicably connected to the key management server 800 and the gaming machine management server 802 , and the information distribution server 901 and the ball management server 902 are communicably connected to the content management server 903 . The content management server 903 is, for example, a server provided in an organization that manages gaming machines operated by an organization in which a plurality of gaming machine manufacturers are affiliated, and mainly distributes content data to each information distribution server 901. It is a server for

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. Referring to FIG. 6, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, notification is made in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. The abnormality referred to here includes replacing the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 with an illegally manufactured one, or malfunctioning or breaking down due to noise or the like. off-line state due to disconnection, etc. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 6 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each serial ID (also called SID) of the electronic component inside the CU 3. be. Also, the key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16 .

First, when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325 of CU3, the CU control section 323 detects the abnormality as a result of mutual authentication performed between the CU control section 323 and the security board 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication, which will be described later.

The serial ID is the serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b of the security board 325 when the security chip 325b is manufactured. Further, when CU3 is brought into the game arcade and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. be.

When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325 , the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 of the abnormality and transmits an abnormality notification command to the liquid crystal unit 500 . The liquid crystal unit control section 502 causes the liquid crystal display control section 503 to perform control for displaying that an abnormality has occurred, and also lights or blinks an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) to notify the abnormality. Furthermore, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal to the effect that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the management computer 900 .

When the CU control unit 323 of the CU3 causes an abnormality, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by mutual authentication and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 with a parallel signal via the PIF circuit 326 which is a parallel interface circuit. The payout control unit 171 receives it and notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. The main control board 16 controls the operation of the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the management computer 900 in the same manner as described above.

When the security board 325 detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171, it notifies the CU control unit 323 to that effect, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect.

In this way, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality in the CU control unit 323, it notifies the payout control unit 171 to that effect via the PIF circuit 326. When the security board 325 detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171, is notified to the CU control unit 323, and the notification destination of the abnormality occurrence by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality, no control is performed to notify the abnormality, and no countermeasures are taken to prevent the abnormality. Moreover, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, it is not possible to control the abnormality notification by itself, and therefore, the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality is always sent to the control section on the opposite side of the control section in which the abnormality has occurred. Note that the payout control unit 171, which receives the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality from the security board 325 via the PIF circuit 326, notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. The main control board 16 receives the notification and performs control for anomaly notification similar to that described above.

When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects the abnormality, notifies the CU control unit 323 of the abnormality, and the CU control unit 323 performs the abnormality notification control described above. It notifies the hall server 801 that an abnormality has occurred. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the main control board 16 detects that an abnormality has occurred, receives the notification, and performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

As described above, the payout control board 17 detects an abnormality in the security board 325 and notifies it to the main control board 16, and when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, it It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 also does not perform control for announcing an abnormality even if it notifies the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it detects that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the control unit or the control board on the opposite side of the control unit in which the abnormality occurred is notified. In addition, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have the function of controlling the abnormality notification themselves even if an abnormality is detected. do not have. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and even if an abnormality is detected, the abnormality notification control is performed by itself. Although it has been described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

The gaming machine management server 802 shown in FIG. 6 is provided in, for example, an organization that manages gaming machines operated by an organization in which a plurality of gaming machine manufacturers are members, and the gaming machines installed in the gaming hall are different from the design values. This is a server that manages gaming machines by checking whether they are in an abnormal state. The gaming machine management server 802 may be provided in another organization. Gaming machine management server 802 can communicate with hall server 801 , CU (card unit) 3 and P stand 2 .

In this embodiment, the information distribution server 901 associates information identifying each gaming machine, such as a main chip ID, as part of the design values of the gaming machine (P machine 2), and determines abnormality of the gaming machine. It stores the judgment value for

Next, FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing major data among various data stored on the CU 3 side and the P stand 2 side, respectively, and their transmission and reception modes. Referring to FIG. 7, major data among various data stored on the CU 3 side and the P stand 2 side and their transmission/reception modes will be described.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P table 2 side, and the current latest number of game balls is stored and managed. The CU3 side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is based on the information transmitted from the P machine 2 side. On the other hand, the number of balls held (the number of balls held on the card), the number of stored balls, and the prepaid balance (balance) are managed and stored on the CU3 side.

FIG. 7 shows data stored in the RAM provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU3 side and data stored in the RAM mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P stand 2 side. First, when the P-machine 2 and the CU 3 are installed in the game hall and the power is turned on in a state where they are electrically connected for the first time, the payout control board 17 on the P-machine 2 side is transferred from the main control board 16 to the main chip. An ID (main control chip ID) is sent, the main chip ID is sent to the CU3 side, and the payout chip ID (payout control chip ID) stored in the payout control board 17 itself is sent to the CU3 side. .

The CU3 side stores the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU3 side and the P machine 2 side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU3 side to the P machine 2 side, and the P machine 2 side receives the transmitted connection time. memorize

In this state, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

On the CU3 side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated to determine whether or not the same P unit 2 as last time is connected. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data is sent from the CU3 side to the P stand 2 side when the communication between the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side is started. The time data is stored on the P stand 2 side.

Both the CU3 and the P unit 2 add a "serial number" to the message and transmit it. Both CU3 and P unit 2 store the "serial number" received from the other party. There are three types of "serial number": "normal serial number", "additional serial number" and "counting serial number". "Normal serial number" indicates the sequence number of the electronic message. The "normal serial number" is transmitted by incrementing (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value set to "1" by the CU3 side (primary station side). However, when retransmitting, the "normal serial number" is not counted up. The P machine 2 side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that no response will be given if the continuity of the serial numbers is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU3 requests the addition of the game balls to the P table 2 . The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P machine 2 requests the CU3 to count the game balls.

Only CU3 has the normal serial number update right. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU3 backs up the normal serial number and then transmits the updated normal serial number. Only CU3 has the addition update right for the addition serial number. When making an addition request, the CU 3 transmits to the P unit 2 an addition serial number obtained by adding 1 to the addition serial number used for communication up to that point. When the P machine 2 accepts the request, it returns the same addition serial number. When rejecting the request, it returns the addition serial number received last time (addition serial number received this time minus 1). Only the P 2 has the right to add and update the counting serial number. When the P unit 2 makes a counting request, it transmits to the CU 3 a counting serial number obtained by adding 1 to the counting serial number used for communication up to that point. CU3 returns the same counting sequence number when it grants the request. When rejecting the request, the received counting serial number (counting serial number received this time minus 1) is returned.

In the following, regarding the "normal serial number", a configuration will be described in which the serial number received by the CU3 is counted up (+1) and transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Each of the P units 2 and CU3 or the P unit 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it, and the other receives the received serial number. may be transmitted as it is.

The "addition serial number" and "counting serial number" are special serial numbers that are counted up in the processing of the addition request and the processing of the counting request, respectively. In the following, a configuration will be described in which when the "additional serial number" and "counting serial number" are counted up, the "normal serial number" is also counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop counting up the "normal serial number" when the "additional serial number" and "counting serial number" are counted up. In addition, hereinafter, the "normal serial number" is simply referred to as the "serial number". Also, the "additional serial number" and the "counting serial number" are collectively referred to as the "request serial number".

The latest gaming machine information (gaming machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side. This latest gaming machine information is stored in the latest gaming machine information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 5) on the P machine 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counting ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest gaming machine information, and is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side as a count value of a game ball number counter as described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball number counter, the number of game balls may also be included in the latest gaming machine information.

The information of these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU3 side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The additional ball is the sum of "the number of winning balls x the number of winning balls" and "the number of back balls". A back ball is a foul ball. That is, the additional ball indicates the number to be added to the game ball by the additional ball counter. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the "number of shot balls". That is, it is the number of balls detected by the output change from ON to OFF of the ball lifting switch (upper) 41a. It should be noted that the “number of balls to be counted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball number counter is a counter that counts the counting ball number. The number of balls to be counted is "the number of balls converted from game balls to possessed balls by a counting operation". Here, the "prize ball" is a ball that is paid out when the ball enters the winning hole, and is a safe ball. The "shooting balls" are balls fired by the gaming machine, and if there are back balls, the number of launch balls is the number of balls after subtracting the back balls. A "back ball" is a ball that has returned to the board surface without jumping from the projectile ball. "Out-hole passing balls" are balls that have passed through the out-hole 154, and the total number of out-balls and safe balls means the number of balls that have passed through the out-hole.

For example, when a pachinko ball hit into the game area 27 wins and winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the game balls are added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (the added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Further, a subtraction ball number counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change of the ball-up switch (upper) 41a from ON to OFF due to the pachinko balls being shot into the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of game balls as the number of balls to be counted by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the number of balls to be counted (the number of balls to be counted) from the P machine 2 side to the CU3 side.

On the P machine 2 side, each time the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, and the counted ball number counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (RAM of the payout control unit 171). etc.) as backup data, the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, and the counting ball number counter as the latest gaming machine information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball number counter). In this embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialize".

As a result, the data of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the gaming machine information transmitted to the CU3 side immediately before, are backed up in the storage area of the previous gaming machine information (the gaming machine information transmitted immediately before). stored as data. When the latest game machine information is not transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side, this backup data is not only the value of each counter this time but also the value of each counter not transmitted last time at the time of the next transmission. This is so that you can also send The number of game balls transmitted immediately before may be added to the previous gaming machine information and stored.

In addition, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball number counter in accordance with the occurrence of winning, the shooting of balls, the occurrence of back balls, and the occurrence of counting balls (conversion from game balls to owned balls), The updated value of the game ball number counter is transmitted to the CU3 side as the game ball number.

On the CU3 side, the total data storage area in the RAM stores the number of game balls, the number of cards held (also referred to simply as the number of balls held), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction. The number of balls (total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held when the card is inserted are stored. It should be noted that the number of balls on the card is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of balls on hand from the number of balls on card at the time of insertion of the number of balls on hand (the number of balls converted from the number of balls on the card to the number of game balls) and adding the number of counted balls. That is, the number of cards possessed is the number of possessed balls currently owned by the player.

Based on the value of the added ball number counter (additional ball number) transmitted from the P machine 2 side, the total added ball number is added to update the ball number. Also, based on the value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2 side, the total subtraction ball number is subtracted to update the ball number. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P machine 2, the card holding ball number is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 updates the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, and the number of cards held by the latest gaming machine information sent from the P machine 2 one by one, thereby managing the latest information. It becomes possible.

As shown, the CU3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives the count value of the game ball number counter (also referred to as the number of game balls or total number of game balls information) from the P table 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3 stores the value of the added ball number counter (the number of added balls), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (the number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P machine 2 side. While updating the number of game balls being played, it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue.

As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the liquid crystal unit 500, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the management computer 900 or the hall server 801 (in this case, the management computer 900 or Error notification may be performed by the hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification is issued to prompt the attendant to take a manual action.

Instead of shifting to the error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P machine 2 side. good. Alternatively, instead of that, the number of game balls managed on the CU3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P machine 2 side may be corrected to an average value.

Thus, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P machine 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if the number of game balls stored on the P machine 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it is possible to check that fact. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. It is also possible to receive the number of game balls and the number of game balls that have been set, and determine whether or not they are consistent with each other.

As shown in FIG. 7, CU3 has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the prepaid balance of the accepted (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (number of added balls). total), the total number of subtracted balls (cumulative number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing the number of balls held when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) stores the accumulated balls in response to an input requesting the use of accumulated balls (for example, operation of the replay button (replay display) on the liquid crystal display (when no balls are held)). A predetermined number of accumulated balls is subtracted from the storage area to be played.

CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) selects a predetermined number of balls from a storage area for storing balls in response to an input requesting use of balls (for example, operation of a replay button (replay display) on the liquid crystal display). Subtract the ball of Furthermore, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the prepaid balance in response to an input requesting use of the prepaid balance (for example, pressing the ball lending button 321).

When a player deducts a predetermined value from the player's possession value (for example, the number of balls held, the number of stored balls, or the prepaid balance) and uses it in the game, the number of balls for the withdrawal to the game ball number counter is transmitted from the CU3 side to the P machine 2 side. In response to this, the P machine 2 side increments and updates the game ball number counter.

On the other hand, the gaming system according to the present embodiment can accept orders for a so-called wagon service in which the player's property value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, receiving wagon service with game balls is restricted, and wagon service can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the hand from picking out the balls remaining on the plate before counting and using them for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation type pachinko game machines equipped with each counter.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the wagon service operation is executed, if the number of balls possessed is less than the number of balls corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform a counting operation. ing. At that time, when the player executes a counting operation, the number of balls counted based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of cards held.

Next, communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 according to this embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (telegram) is always transmitted in units of one frame. In other words, the message is not divided and transmitted. Also, when sending electronic messages continuously, leave an interval of 1 millisecond or more.

One frame of transmission data includes data length, normal serial number, addition serial number, counting serial number, command, and data portion. "Data length" indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number - data part (business message range)). "Command" is the command code of the message. A "data part" is the data of a telegram.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P unit 2 will be described.

FIG. 8 shows the direction of transmission, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the name and outline of the transmission information. First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU3 and the P unit 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P unit 2 (secondary station), and P unit 2 responds to the command and returns a response to CU3. In other words, the transmission of the business message is a command/response method with the CU 3 as the primary station and the P unit 2 as the secondary station.

The period from the transmission of the first command from CU3 to P unit 2 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200ms, ie, 0.2 seconds. Also, the period from the transmission of the response from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 to the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, ie, 0.2 seconds.

Thus, both the command and the response are transmitted between the CU3 and the P unit 2 at intervals of 200ms. On the other hand, since 100 pachinko balls are hit into the game area 27 per minute by operating the ball hitting operation handle 25 of the P table 2, the ball shooting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, multiple commands and responses are transmitted and received while one ball is fired.

Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are transmitted from the P machine 2 to the CU 3 one after another at intervals shorter than the ball shooting time interval. As a result, the P machine 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

Here, the command and response transmission interval is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be set to a longer interval or a shorter interval. It is also conceivable to match with

First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU3 to the P unit 2 . This recovery request command requests recovery information from the P machine 2 . In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3. This recovery response notifies recovery information to CU3.

The recovery request command is transmitted from CU3 to P unit 2 after CU3 completes authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU3 to the P unit 2, and the same command is first transmitted after the CU3 completes authentication. The recovery request includes "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission serial number" and "previous final transmission count serial number". "Serial number" is a sequence number (1 to 255). "Command" is a command code of a recovery request and is indicated by binary data in hexadecimal notation.

The "previous final transmission serial number" is the serial number of the state information request command last transmitted to the P unit 2 during the previous connection. If the "previous final transmission serial number" is "0", it indicates that there is no stored serial number. The "previous final transmission sequence number" is a serial number that is stored as the previous final transmission sequence number (serial number) on both the P unit 2 and CU3 side when the status information response is sent by the P unit 2 and when the status information response is received by the CU3. is.

The "previous final transmission counted serial number" is the counted serial number of the response to the state information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the time of the previous connection. When the "previous final transmission count serial number" is "0", it indicates that there is no stored serial number. The "previous final transmission count serial number" is a serial number that is stored as the previous final transmission count serial number on both the P unit 2 and the CU3 side when the P unit 2 transmits the state information response and the CU 3 receives the state information response. .

In the recovery process (number of balls counted) of the P machine 2, the "shop code" and "SC board ID" notified from the security board 325 in the counting history sequence to be described later, and the "shop code" held by the P machine 2 and "SC board ID", and if they match, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the number of required balls to be counted=0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

The P machine 2 refers to the "previous final transmission count serial number" notified by the CU3, and sets the number of balls requested to be counted to 0 in the subtraction register if the count request has not been performed by the CU3. The user program executed on the P machine 2 is notified. When CU3 has completed the counting process, it sets the number of balls required for counting notified to CU3 in the subtraction register and notifies the user program. If the store codes held by the P machine 2 are all "F" (hexadecimal), it is determined that the store codes match. If the "store code" notified from the security board 325 and the "store code" held in the P stand 2 do not match, the user program is notified of the store code mismatch via the register. When the P unit 2 receives a recovery request command from the CU 3, the P unit 2 notifies the user program through the register.

The recovery response response is a response of the recovery information held by the P unit 2 to the CU3. The recovery information includes "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission serial number", "previous inserted card ID", "previous card insertion time", "previous final transmission additional serial number", "ball unit price", and "game information". storage status", "previous game machine information", and "previous game information". The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated.

"Previous final transmission serial number" is the data of the serial number included in the response of the state information response last transmitted to the CU3 at the time of the previous connection. The "previous inserted card ID" is data of the card ID of the card that was inserted at the time of the previous connection, and "0" means that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171 of the P machine 2 stores and holds the card ID being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3.

The "previous card insertion time" is data of the insertion time of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection. This data is also represented by 2-digit YY for year information, 2-digit MM for month information, 2-digit DD for day information, 2-digit hh for hour information, 2-digit mm for minute information, and 2-digit ss for second information. is. "Previous final transmission addition serial number" is the addition serial number included in the response of the state information response last transmitted to CU3 at the time of the previous connection. The “ball unit price” is the ball unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per ball played on the P machine 2 . The “whether game information is stored” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

"Previous gaming machine information" is gaming machine information previously notified to CU3, and includes information of "number of game balls", "game ball information", "number of balls requested to be counted", and "counting serial number". "Number of game balls" is the number of game balls previously notified to CU3. "Game ball information" is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information includes, for example, the number of shot balls previously notified to CU3, the number of balls passed through the outlet, the total number of prize balls, and the like. "Number of balls required to be counted" is the number of game balls to be counted. "Counting serial number" is the counting serial number previously notified to CU3.

"Previous game information" is the game information previously notified to CU3, and includes information of "number of game information" and "game information 1" to "game information n". “Number of game information” is the number (1 to n) of game information previously notified to CU3. Note that n=0 to 22 and variable length. "Game information 1" is the game information 1 previously notified to CU3. "Game information n" is the game information n previously notified to CU3. The game information n includes, for example, the type information notified to the CU3 last time, game prize ball information, and the like.

The "previous final transmission addition serial number" is a serial number that is stored as the previous final transmission addition serial number for both the CU3 side and the P machine 2 when the status information request is transmitted by the CU3 and the status information request is received by the P machine 2.

In the recovery process (game information) of the P machine 2, the "shop code" and "SC board ID" notified from the security board 325 in the counting history sequence described later, the "shop code" and the "shop code" held by the P machine 2 Matching with the "SC board ID" is determined, and if the "store code" does not match, it is processed as if there is no recovery data. If they match, the following processing is performed.

If there is game information recovery data, set "game information storage presence/absence" to 0x01, and the previous "number of game balls", previous "game ball information", previous "count request number of balls", and previous " The recovery data held by the P machine 2 are set in the "count serial number", the previous "game information number", and the previous "game information 1 to n". When there is no game information recovery data or when the previous last transmission sequence number is 0, the "game information storage status" is set to "0x00", and the previous "game ball information", the previous "number of "count serial number" and the previous "number of game information" are set to ALL "0". However, the number of game balls is set to the number of game balls notified last time. If the store codes held by the P machine 2 are all "F" (hexadecimal), it is determined that the store codes match.

If it is determined that the "store code" notified from the security board 325 does not match the store code held in the P stand 2, it is processed as if there is no card. That is, the "previous card ID inserted" and the "previous card insertion time" are all set to "0".

The P machine 2 stores the serial number at the time of responding to the status information request as the previous final transmission serial number. The "shop code" and "SC board ID" notified from the security board 325 are compared with the information held in the P unit, and if they do not match, the previous last transmission serial number=0 is notified. The "store code" and "SC board ID" notified from the security board 325 are compared with the information held in the P unit, and if they match, the stored previous and final transmission sequence number is notified.

The P unit 2 stores the counting serial number as the last transmission counting serial number when transmitting the status information response. The "store code" and "SC board ID" notified from the SC 325b are compared with the information held by the P unit, and if they do not match, the previous final transmission count serial number=0 is notified. The "store code" and "SC board ID" notified from the security board 325 are compared with the information held in the P unit, and if they match, the stored previous and final transmission count serial number is notified.

Further, if the CU 3 has not performed the processing of the “previous final transmission serial number” notified from the P machine 2, the CU 3 performs recovery processing using the previous gaming machine information. In addition, when the processing of the "previous final transmission serial number" is being performed, the CU3 performs recovery processing using only the previous gaming machine information. However, the number of balls counted will not be recovered.

A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from CU3 to P machine 2 . This recovery request 2 command is for notifying the P machine 2 of addition recovery information. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3. This recovery response 2 notifies the CU3 of the processing result of the addition recovery information.

The command of the recovery request 2 is for notifying the addition recovery information to the P machine 2, and includes the data of "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission addition serial number" and "additional number of balls". there is The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3 determines that the P machine 2 needs to perform the addition ball recovery process. The CU 3 compares the "previous final transmission addition serial number" included in the recovery response received from the P unit 2 with the "previous final transmission addition serial number" stored by itself, and if they match, recovers the addition ball. It is determined that the processing is not necessary, and if they do not match, it is determined that the addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that the addition ball recovery process is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

The "previous final transmission additional serial number" included in the recovery request 2 is data of the additional serial number of the command of the state information request last transmitted to the P machine 2 at the time of the previous connection, and the "additional ball number" is the game ball number. is the data of the number of added balls.

Next, the recovery processing of the P machine 2 will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P machine 2, if the P machine 2 did not process the "previous final transmission serial number" notified from the CU 3 based on the recovery request 2, the number of added balls is referred to This is a process of performing addition with respect to

The recovery response 2 notifies the CU3 of the processing result of the addition recovery information in the P unit 2, and includes "serial number", "command" and "recovery result". The "recovery result" is "0x00" for recovery result processing OK, and "0x01" for recovery result processing NG. In addition, when the P machine 2 cannot receive the number of added balls, it responds with processing NG as a recovery result.

When performing recovery processing (additional number of balls) for P machine 2, if P machine 2 did not process the "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified from CU3, processing is OK as "recovery result" to CU3 , sets the number of addition balls notified from CU3 in the addition register and notifies the user program. When the number of added balls notified from CU3=0, the number of added balls=0 is set in the addition register, notified to the user program, and processing OK is responded to CU3. However, when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is requesting game ball addition (Bit=1), if the game machine state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit 5=1) in the state information response, the CU3 Result”, the processing NG is responded, the number of addition balls=0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified.

If the "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified by CU3 is the same as the "previous final transmission addition serial number" held by the chip of P unit 2, the number of addition balls = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is responded to CU3 as "recovery result". If the "previous final transmission addition sequence number" notified by CU3 = 0, the number of addition balls = 0 is set in the addition register regardless of the number of addition balls notified by CU3, and the user program is notified to CU3. Respond with processing OK.

Also, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), regardless of the recovery result, the user program is notified of the "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified from the CU3 via the register. . If the recovery request 2 is not received, the user program is notified of the "previous final transmission addition serial number" held by the chip of the P unit 2 at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

A state information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). This state information request command requests the state of the CU 3 from the P unit 2 . CU3 uses this command to check the status of P-unit 2 periodically. Also, the state information request command includes the number of added balls from the CU3 side to the P table 2 side shown in FIG.

The status information request will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the state information request. The specific data of the status information request includes the data of "serial number", "command", "CU status", "additional ball count", "additional serial number", "counting serial number", and "ball unit price". there is The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated.

"CU state" represents the state of CU3 notified to P unit 2. When Bit0 is "1", the card insertion state is ON, i.e., the card is being inserted. Each indicates OFF, that is, no card is inserted. That is, Bit0 represents a state (card insertion state) in which a card (general card/membership card) is inserted into CU3. In addition, when the stock card (general 0-yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of CU3 is charged, the general card is being inserted.

When Bit1 is "1", it indicates that the card unit is open, and when it is "0", it indicates that the card unit is closed. In other words, Bit1 notifies the card unit open state to the P stand 2 according to the state of the CU3. The timing for notifying that the card unit is open is, for example, when the store is opened. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from open to closed, the P machine 2 notifies the CU 3 of all the game balls it holds as the number of counted balls in the status information response.

When Bit2 is "1", it indicates that the card is being prepared for return, and when it is "0", it indicates that the card is not being prepared for return. The CU3 notifies the P machine 2 of "preparing for card return" for a certain period of time (10 seconds) by setting this bit at the time of card return, simple leave, and meal break operations. When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, if the P-unit 2 receives the status information request with the bit indicating that the card is being prepared for return being ON, whether the counting button has been operated once or multiple times. Regardless of the operation duration time, all the game balls stored are notified to the CU3 as the number of counted balls in the status information response.

When Bit3 is "1", the game ball addition request is ON, ie, there is a game ball addition request, and when it is "0", the game ball addition request is OFF, ie, there is no game ball addition request. That is, Bit 3 requests the addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, ball payout, and accumulated ball payout operations.

When Bit4 is "1", it indicates that the counting balls have been received, and "0" indicates that the counting balls have not been received. Bit 4 notifies the P machine 2 that the reception is completed when the counting balls are received. In other words, it is used to confirm delivery of the status information response "number of balls counted". The P machine 2 checks whether the counting serial number is the same as that of the P machine 2 when receiving the completion of receiving the counting balls, and notifies the CU3 without subtracting the number of game balls when the serial numbers do not match.

When Bit5 is "1", it indicates that the card is waiting for removal, and "0" indicates that the card has been removed. Bit 5 notifies the P unit 2 that the CU 3 is waiting for the card to be removed. Bit6 and Bit7 are unused.

The "number of added balls" is the number of added balls of the game balls, and the data of the number of added balls is valid only when Bit3 in the CU state is "1". The "addition serial number" is a sequence number for addition (0 to 255), and the sequence number is updated (+1) and notified when the game ball addition is requested. "Counting serial number" is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the counting serial number received at the time of counting request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting serial number is not established, the counting receipt will not be issued.

The “ball unit price” is the ball unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per game ball played on the P table 2 . The ball unit price notified from the CU3 to the P machines 2 is stored in the RAM of the payout control board 17 of the P machines 2, for example. Then, the P machine 2 notifies the CU 3 of the unit price of balls stored in the RAM when a predetermined condition is satisfied, as a status information response. Specifically, when the CU3 requests the P unit 2 for recovery information for recovering from a state in which communication is disabled (a recovery request command is sent from the CU3), the P unit 2 responds to the recovery response. Set the ball unit price and send it to CU3. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notification to CU3 at the time of recovery response. The ball unit price stored in the P machine 2 is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is transmitted from the CU3, and is transmitted to the CU3. Thus, the ball unit price of the game balls played on the P table 2 before the recovery can be accurately grasped, and the player can restart the game with an appropriate game value after the recovery. In addition, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in the P machine 2 to the outside except for notifying the CU3 at the time of recovery response, security is ensured so that the ball unit price is not illegally changed. Further, the ball unit price stored in the P machine 2 is prohibited from being overwritten with a new ball unit price when the P machine 2 holds the number of game balls. Even when the P machine 2 holds the number of game balls, overwriting of the ball unit price stored in the P machine 2 is allowed, and the number of game balls held is converted to the overwritten ball unit price and displayed. may be updated.

In response to the state information request, the P unit 2 sends a state information response to the CU3. This state information response notifies the CU3 of the information and state of the P unit 2 . The status information response includes the latest gaming machine information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

The status information response will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the status information response. Specific data of the status information response include "serial number", "command", "CU control unit request information", "number of game balls", "number of shot balls", "number of outro passing balls", "total prize balls". number", "number of balls required to be counted", "counting serial number", "fire intensity", "game machine status", "game machine error status", "fraud detection information", "fraud detection status", "additional serial number", and "game information" data. The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated.

The "number of game balls" is the current number of game balls (number of game balls resulting from calculation of addition/subtraction). "Number of shot balls" is the number of shots (total if there are multiple shot balls at the time of transmission). The "number of balls passed through the out-hole" is the number of balls that have passed through the out-hole 154 (when there are a plurality of balls passed at the time of transmission, the number is summed up). The “total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize information 1-n. “Number of balls requested to be counted” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. The "counting serial number" is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and when a counting request is made, the sequence number is updated (+1) and notified. The “first prize winning opening” is information about winning the normal winning opening 272 . “Second prize winning” is information about winning to the normal winning gate 273 . “Third prize-winning prize” is information about prize-winning to the normal prize-winning port 274 . The “fourth winning opening” is information about winning to the start winning opening 275 . “Fifth winning opening winning” is information about winning the start winning opening 276 . The “sixth winning opening winning” is information about winning to the starting winning opening 277 . “Grand prize opening prize” is information about winning a prize to the big prize opening 271 .

The “shooting intensity” is information on the shooting intensity of the game ball. "Game machine state" indicates the state of machine P 2 at the time when the command for requesting state information is transmitted from CU3 to machine P 2, and includes "game machine state 1", "game machine state 2", and "game machine state 2". It contains information on "gaming machine state 3" and "gaming machine error state".

For example, Bit 5 of "gaming machine state 1" indicates whether or not the P machine 2 has added game balls in accordance with the addition request received from the CU3. Bit5 is set to "0" when game balls are normally added, and Bit5 is set to "1" when not normally added.

"Fraud detection information" is information detected by the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting status information was sent from the CU3 to the P machine 2, and "Fraud detection status 1" and "Fraud detection status 2". , and “fraud detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4”.

For example, Bit 6 of "fraudulent detection state 2" is a fraudulent ball rental detection flag, and indicates whether or not an addition request has been received with no card inserted in CU3. Bit 6 is set to "0" when an addition request is received with a card inserted in the CU3, and Bit 6 is set to "1" when an addition request is received with no card inserted into the CU3. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 sets Bit 6 to "1" when it determines that no card is inserted in CU3 despite the receipt of the addition request in the state information request reception process (see FIG. 21) described later. set to It should be noted that once Bit 6 of "unauthorized detection state 2" is set to "1", it remains set to "1" until the power supply of the P unit 2 is turned off.

In addition, "fraud detection information 3" is valid when Bit 6 of "fraud detection state 2" is "1", and the number of balls that were about to be lent with no card inserted (also referred to as the number of illicit balls to be lent) It represents the accumulated results.

"Addition serial number" is a sequence number for addition, and the addition serial number received at the time of the addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition serial number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

“Fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17 . For example, Bit 1 of "fraud detection state 3" indicates that it is fraud detection information of iron ball detection when it is "1".

The “game information” is information of the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2. ”, and “count information 1” to “count information n”.

The card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, the P unit 2 sends a card insertion response to the CU3. This card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to CU3.

The card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of the card ID and the insertion time of the inserted card when the card is inserted, and includes "serial number", "command", "card ID", "card insertion time", and "card insertion time". The data of "store code" and "SC board ID" are included. The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated.

“Card ID” is identification ID information of the IC card inserted in the CU 3 and is used for linking with the game balls held by the P table 2 . "Card insertion time" is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion/ejection port 309 (see FIG. 1) of CU3, and the year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. DD, two-digit hh for time information, two-digit mm for minute information, and two-digit ss for second information. The card insertion time is used for judging whether the game balls held by the P table 2 are today's balls or past balls.

The “store code” is a store identification code where the CU3 is installed, and is used for linking the game balls held by the P table 2 . It is also used to determine whether CU3 has been moved to another store. CU3 stores the store code where it is located. The store code is added with information from the security board 325 and notified to the P units. "SC board ID" is an SC board ID for identifying CU3, and is used to determine whether CU3 has been replaced. The SC board ID is notified to the P stand 2 by adding information from the security board 325 . The payout control unit 171 of the P machine 2 stores the information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The "store code" and "SC board ID" are deleted in the payout control circuit without notifying the user program.

The card insertion response notifies CU3 that the card insertion notification has been received normally, and includes data of "serial number", "command" and "result". The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated. "Result" indicates whether or not card ID and card insertion time were normally overwritten when payment control unit 171 received the card insertion notification, that is, whether or not the card insertion notification was normally received. ing. When the card insertion notification is accepted normally, "OK" is indicated as "result", and when the card insertion notification is not accepted normally, "NG" is indicated as "result". If the "card insertion time" specified by the card insertion notification is a value in a format other than a predetermined format (for example, a BCD value (binary coded decimal)), the "result" is NG. is shown.

Here, the operation of the P unit 2 at the time of card insertion/return notification will be described. First, by inserting a membership card or a general card into the card insertion/ejection port 309 of the CU3 or depositing money into a general 0-yen 0 coin card, the card is sent to the P machine 2 as a card insertion notification. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. The P unit 2 backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time upon receiving the card insertion notification. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a state information request including information indicating that the CU3 is in the card insertion state (CU state Bit 0 = 1) is received (when the P unit 2 determines that the card is being inserted ), the P unit 2 transmits only the response without backing up the information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Further, when the card return button 322 of CU3 is pressed, card return notification is sent to the P machine 2, and the P machine 2 clears the backed up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P unit 2 receives the card return notification command.

When the card ID and the card insertion time are overwritten normally, that is, when the card insertion notification is normally received, the P machine 2 stores a card insertion flag indicating that the card is inserted in the RAM of the payout control unit 171. set.

The card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of card return. In response to this card return notification, the P unit 2 sends a card return response to the CU3. This card return response is a card return response to CU3.

The card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of card return, and the CU 3 transmits the same notification when the "card return" button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of "serial number" and "command". The "serial number" and "command" are the same as above, so the description will not be repeated.

The card return response is for sending a card return notification response to the CU3, and includes data of "serial number", "command", "card ID", and "card insertion time". The "serial number", "command", "card ID" and "card insertion time" are the same as described above, so description thereof will not be repeated. When returning the card, the CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card that is currently inserted, or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , Prohibit writing to the card of the ball, etc.

Here, the operation of the P unit 2 at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3 performs the operation of inserting a member card, inserting a general card, or depositing money into a general 0-yen 0 coin card, the P unit 2 backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When the "card return" button is pressed on the CU3 at the time of the card return notification, the P unit 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time. Furthermore, the P machine 2 clears the card-insertion flag set in the RAM of the payout control unit 171 .

The design value acquisition request command requests the CU 3 to acquire design values such as the number of prize balls for each winning hole (design values excluding the judgment value for judging the abnormality of the P table 2). Sent when the gaming machine starts up. The design value acquisition request command in this embodiment includes design value data such as the number of winning balls for each winning hole. That is, the CU 3 acquires design value data such as the number of winning balls for each winning hole by receiving a design value acquisition request command from the P table 2 .

In response to this design value acquisition request, the CU 3 sends a response named “design value acquisition response” to the P table 2 . This design value acquisition response is for responding to acquisition of design values such as the number of winning balls for each winning hole to the P table 2, and is transmitted in response to the acquisition of the design values by the CU3.

The test-hit mode request command is for requesting control from the CU 3 to the P-table 2 to enter the test-hit mode, which will be described later. sent. In response to this trial-hitting mode request, the P stand 2 transmits a trial-hitting mode response to the CU3. This test hit mode response is a response to the CU3 that the P table 2 has been controlled to the test hit mode.

The commercial mode request command is for requesting control from the CU 3 to the P table 2 to the commercial mode, which will be described later. sent. In response to this commercial mode request, the P unit 2 transmits a commercial mode response to the CU3. This commercial mode response is a response to the CU3 that the P machine 2 has been controlled to the commercial mode.

Bits 4 and 5 of "Fraud Detection State 3" in FIG. 11 described above, when the value is "1", represent fraud detection information of base anomaly at low base and base anomaly at high base, respectively.

Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the base, abnormalities in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are also determined. The definitions of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are stipulated in the regulations concerning certification of gaming machines, type certification, and the like.

The role ratio (also referred to as role ratio) refers to the ratio of the game balls acquired by the game balls fired in 10 hours due to the operation of the role. The above rule stipulates that the character ratio must be 70% or less. In this embodiment, the role ratio corresponds to the game value given by winning the pachinko balls fired in 10 hours (60,000 balls because 100 balls can be fired in one minute) into all the winning holes. Among the number of pachinko balls, the pachinko balls to the start winning hole 276 constituted by an electric tulip as one of the accessories and the big winning hole 271 constituted by a variable winning ball device as one of the accessories. means the ratio of the number of pachinko balls corresponding to the game value given by winning a prize.

The continuous role ratio (also referred to as “continuous ratio”) is the number of game balls obtained from game balls fired in 10 hours, which is due to the operation of the relevant role when the role is continuously operated. Percentage. The above rule stipulates that the continuous role ratio must be 60% or less. In this embodiment, the continuous role ratio corresponds to the game value given by winning the pachinko balls fired in 10 hours (60,000 balls because 100 balls can be fired in one minute) into all the winning holes. The ratio of the number of pachinko balls corresponding to the game value given by winning the pachinko balls to the big winning hole 271 provided with the variable winning ball device, which is one of the accessories, out of the number of pachinko balls to be played. .

Bits 4 and 5 of "Fraud Detection State 3" in FIG. 11 described above, when the value is "1", represent fraud detection information of base anomaly at low base and base anomaly at high base, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, an outline of commands transmitted and received between CU3 (CU control section 323) and liquid crystal unit 500 (liquid crystal unit control section 502) will be described.

FIG. 12 shows the direction of transmission, the commands to be transmitted, the name of each command and its outline. First, transmission of commands between the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the liquid crystal unit 500 returns the command in response to the command.

The period from transmission of the first command from CU3 to liquid crystal unit 500 to transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, ie, 0.2 seconds. Also, the period from when the command is sent from the liquid crystal unit 500 to the CU 3 until when the next command is sent is controlled to 200 ms, ie, 0.2 seconds.

First, the connection request command is a command for transmitting display instructions and data from the CU3 to the liquid crystal unit 500 when the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 are connected, and the connection response command is a connection request command. This command indicates the response to the

The game machine connection notification command is a command for transmitting data at the time of connecting the game machine from the CU3 to the liquid crystal unit 500 when the CU3 and the game machine (P machine P2) are connected. is a command indicating a response to the gaming machine connection notification command. As shown in FIG. 13, the specific data of the gaming machine connection notification command include "game machine chip ID", "game machine maker code", "game machine model code", and "1 prize winning ball". , “number of winning prize balls 2”, “number of big winning prize balls”, etc. are included.

The start-up notification command is a command for transmitting a start screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the start-up response command is a command indicating a response to the start-up notification command.

The standby display notification command is a command for transmitting a standby screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The standby display response command is a command indicating a response to the standby display notification command. is.

The screen switching notification command is a command for transmitting a switching instruction to various display screens from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the screen switching response command is a command indicating a response to the screen switching notification command.

The status request command is a command for transmitting notification contents from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500 when no screen switching operation is performed, and the status response command is a command indicating a response to the status request command. As shown in FIG. 14, the state request commands include "number of game balls", "number of shot balls", "number of passing balls", "total number of prize balls 1", "ball firing volume", " Game machine state 1", "game machine state 2", "game machine state 3", "game machine error state", "winning gate 1", "winning gate 2", "winning gate 3", "winning gate 4" , ``winning slot 5'', ``winning slot 6'', ``big winning slot'', ``whether or not event mode is set'', and ``number of designated balls in test hitting mode''. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the status response command includes data such as "liquid crystal control notification event".

In addition, the P machine 2 in the present embodiment accepts a player's deposit, game ball lending operation, and game ball payout operation of a player's possession or stored balls to lend a game ball. A test hit mode in which game balls are automatically fired without receiving deposits, game ball lending operations, payout operations of owned balls or stored balls, etc., and no prize balls are paid out, It is possible to switch to an event mode in which a game can be played by accepting the lending operation and lending game balls, but no prize balls are paid out. The data of "whether or not event mode is set" is data for notifying the liquid crystal unit 500 whether the P machine 2 is controlled (switched) to any of the commercial mode, test shot mode, and event mode. .

The card information notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the card insertion screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The card information response command is a command indicating a response to the card information notification command. .

The deposit detection notification command is a command for transmitting the display instruction and data of the depositing screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the deposit detection response command is a command indicating a response to the deposit detection notification command.

The payment completion notification command is a command for transmitting a payment completion screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the payment completion response command is a command indicating a response to the payment completion notification command.

The consumption completion notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the consumption screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the consumption completion response command is a command indicating a response to the consumption completion notification command.

The counting completion notification command is a command for transmitting the display instruction and data of the screen during counting from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the counting completion response command is a command indicating a response to the counting completion notification command.

The payout completion notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the payout screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the payout completion response command is a command indicating a response to the payout completion notification command.

The error notification command is a command for transmitting an error screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the error response command is a command indicating a response to the error notification command.

The shared information notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the sharing start screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the shared information response command is a command indicating a response to the shared information notification command.

The sharing notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data during sharing processing from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the sharing response command is a command indicating a response to the sharing notification command.

The total number of balls notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the total number of balls screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the total number of balls response command indicates a response to the total number of balls notification command. is a command.

The point notification command is a command for transmitting a point screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the point response command is a command indicating a response to the point notification command.

The card OP notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the stock card operation mode screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the card OP response command is a command indicating a response to the card OP notification command. be.

The safe OP notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the safe operation mode screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The safe OP response command is a command indicating a response to the safe OP notification command. .

The address setting notification command is a command for transmitting an address setting screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the Aso-res setting response command is a command indicating a response to the address setting notification command. .

The polling start notification command is a command for transmitting a display screen display instruction and data when using electronic money from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The polling start response command indicates a response to the polling start notification command. is a command.

The leaving notice command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the away from seat screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The leaving response command is a command indicating a response to the leaving notice command. .

The trouble mode notification command is a command for transmitting a trouble mode screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the trouble mode response command is a command indicating a response to the trouble mode notification command.

The store closing process notification command is a command for transmitting a store closing screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the store closing process response command is a command indicating a response to the store closing process notification command.

The maintenance start notification command is a command for transmitting a maintenance display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the maintenance start response command is a command indicating a response to the maintenance start notification command.

The transaction data notification command is a command for transmitting a transaction data display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the transaction data response command is a command indicating a response to the transaction data notification command.

The error log data notification command is a command for transmitting error log data display instructions and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The error log data response command is a command indicating a response to the error log data notification command. is.

The communication status notification command is a command for transmitting a communication status display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the communication status response command is a command indicating a response to the communication status notification command.

The unit information notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for simple unit information from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The unit information response command is a command indicating a response to the unit information notification command. .

The machine reservation notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for a machine reservation screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the machine reservation response command is a command indicating a response to the machine reservation notification command. .

The password entry screen notification command is a command for transmitting a password entry screen display instruction and data from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The password entry screen response command is a command indicating a response to the password entry screen notification command. is.

The action-specific latest data notification command is a command for transmitting a display instruction and data for the action-specific latest data display from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The action-specific latest data response command is the action-specific latest data notification command. This command indicates the response to the

The game ball OP notification command is a command for transmitting the display instruction and data of the game ball operation mode screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the game ball OP response command is a response to the game ball OP notification command. command to show

The metered rate setting notification command is a command for transmitting the display instruction and data of the metered rate setting screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the metered rate setting response command indicates a response to the metered rate setting notification command. is a command.

The game machine count history data notification command is a command for transmitting display instructions and data for the game machine count history data screen from the CU 3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The game machine count history data response command is a command for the game machine count history data. This command indicates a response to the data notification command.

The inspection command is a command used for inspection by the manufacturer of the liquid crystal unit 500 .

Next, the main sequence in communication between CU3 and P stand 2 will be described.

FIG. 16 shows the processing of CU3 and P-unit 2 when a card is inserted.

The processing of CU3 and P stand 2 when the card is returned is as shown in FIG.

Card ID and insertion time are prohibited from being updated during card insertion. As a condition for this prohibition, the relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU status included in the status information request command is as shown in FIG.

FIG. 19 shows the processing for lending game balls from the prepaid balance of the inserted card.

FIG. 20 shows the process of paying out owned balls, paying out stored balls, and replaying the game.

The status information request reception process is as shown in FIG.

Next, errors reported in the gaming system according to the present embodiment will be collectively described. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining types of errors that can be notified in the gaming system. In FIG. 22, 36 types of errors are described, and the "priority", "error code", "error name", "error detection content", "notification means", and "error cancellation method" of each error are described. ” is stated.

For example, the number 28 error has a "priority" of "7", an "error code" of "F60", an "error name" of "unauthorized ball lending detection", and an "error detection content" of "other than card insertion". A request to add the number of rented balls has been received", the "notification means" is "game machine frame, unit", and the "error cancellation method" is "automatic return". Here, when notifying in the game machine frame, in addition to notifying by displaying an "error code" on a display device such as the game ball number indicator 29 (for example, the variable display device 278), an error code provided on the payout control board 17 Alternatively, an "error code" may be displayed on a 7-segment LED display for notification. Also, instead of displaying the "error code", the game may be stopped to report an error, or error information may be output to the outside.

The reporting means may report the error by outputting a sound on the game board or lighting up an electric decoration depending on the type of the error. Further, the notification means may notify the error by outputting information output 1 and information output 2 to the hall server 801 depending on the type of error. In addition to the "automatic recovery", the "error cancellation method" includes a "power OFF/ON" method to turn the power OFF once and turn it ON, and a "cancel switch" to press the cancel switch.

"Automatic recovery" is an error canceling method in which the process automatically recovers from the error state after a certain period of time has elapsed after the reporting means has reported the error. "Power OFF/ON" is literally a method of recovering from an error state by turning OFF the power of the P base 2 once and turning it ON. "Release switch" is an error release method for recovering from an error state by pressing an error release switch (not shown) provided on the payout control board 17, for example. By pressing the error release switch, the abnormality flag of the subtraction sensor or the like stored in the payout control board 17 is reset, and the error state can be recovered. In other words, an error that requires an error canceling method by the "cancellation switch" is mainly intended for an error that has some data stored in the payout control board 17 and that requires resetting of the data. Errors that require an error reset method by "power OFF/ON" include not only the data stored in the payout control board 17 but also the data stored in the main control board 16 etc. Mainly targeted. "Automatic recovery" is primarily intended for errors that do not require data reset.

In addition, errors that occur before execution of a predetermined process such as a user program is started include an in-game authentication inconsistency error with error code "F91" and an error in in-game communication error with error code "F96". However, if they occur at the same time, the error with the higher priority is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, the priority of the error code "F91" is "16", and the priority of the error code "F96" is "21". It is displayed on the game ball number indicator 29 . A plurality of errors may be displayed in order of priority if the display device is capable of displaying a plurality of errors.

Next, the main sequence in communication when power is turned on to the P stand 2, the CU 3, and the liquid crystal unit 500, and the liquid crystal unit 500 and the information distribution server 901 when content is distributed from the information distribution server 901 to the liquid crystal unit 500 A main sequence in the communication will be explained.

Processing of CU3, liquid crystal unit 500 and P stand 2 when power is turned on to CU3, liquid crystal unit 500 and P stand 2 is as shown in FIG. Particularly, in this embodiment, when power is turned on to the P machine 2, the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500, first, the design value acquisition request command including the design value data such as the number of winning balls is sent from the P machine 2 to the CU3. , the design value data such as the number of winning balls for each winning hole is stored in a RAM (not shown) in the CU control unit 323 .

After the initial operation (initialization processing in the liquid crystal unit 500) is completed in the liquid crystal unit 500 and communication between the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 becomes possible (the liquid crystal unit 500 responds to the connection request command of the CU3). After the command can be returned), the game machine chip ID, game machine manufacturer code, game machine model code, winning prize ball number 1, winning prize ball number 2, big prize are sent from CU3 to the liquid crystal unit 500 A game machine connection notification command including each command for the number of prize balls is transmitted. The gaming machine chip ID is data that can identify the P machine 2 (more precisely, the main control unit 161), and the gaming machine manufacturer code is data that allows the manufacturer of the P machine 2 to be identified. The machine model code is data that can identify the model of the P machine 2 . These gaming chip ID, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine model code are stored in advance in a RAM storage section (not shown) of the main control section 161, and when power is turned on to the P table 2 and CU3, the P second is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM (not shown) of the CU control unit 323 by being transmitted to the CU3.

When the liquid crystal unit 500 receives the game machine connection notification command from the CU 3, the winning openings 1 to 4 and the winning opening 6 (normal winning openings 272 to 274, start winning opening 275 and starting The number of prize balls for winning the prize to the prize opening 277) is the number of prize balls An (n is any value from 1 to 4 or 6), and the number of prize balls 2 specified from the number of prize balls 2 command ( The number of prize balls for winning the starting prize opening 276) is the starting prize opening prize series with accessories As, and the number of prize balls for winning the big prize opening 271 specified from the number of balls command is the big prize prize. It is stored as the number of balls Ab.

Then, main processing when power is turned on to CU3, liquid crystal unit 500 and P stand 2 (play machine connection response between CU3 and liquid crystal unit 500 shown in FIG. 23, start-up notification, start-up response, waiting After the transmission/reception of each command of display notification and standby display response) is completed, a state connection request command is transmitted from the CU3 to the P unit 2. FIG. When the P machine 2 receives the state information request command from the CU3, it transmits to the CU3 a state information response command (see FIG. 10) including data such as game ball information, firing intensity, and game state.

When the CU 3 receives the state information response command from the P unit 2 , it transmits a state request command to the liquid crystal unit 500 . The state request command includes commands indicating each data specified from the state information response command received from the P machine 2 (the number of game balls, the number of shot balls, the number of balls passed through the outlet, and the total number of prize balls shown in FIG. 14). 1, ball launch volume, gaming table statuses 1-3, gaming table error status, winning openings 1-6, big winning openings, etc.). For this reason, in the liquid crystal unit 500, the contents of the state request command received from CU3 (number of game balls, number of fired balls, number of balls passed through the outlet, total number of prize balls 1, ball firing volume, game table status 1 to 3, game It is possible to update the display of the liquid crystal display 504 based on commands such as machine error state, winning openings 1 to 6, and large winning openings.

When the liquid crystal unit 500 receives the state request command from CU3, it transmits a state response command to CU3. Upon receiving the state response command from the liquid crystal unit 500, the CU3 transmits the state information request command to the P stand 2 again. Thereafter, transmission and reception of the status information request command, the status information response command, the status request command, and the status response command are repeatedly executed among the CU 3, the liquid crystal unit 500, and the P unit 2. FIG.

Processing of the liquid crystal unit 500 and the information distribution server 901 when content is distributed from the information distribution server 901 to the liquid crystal unit 500 is as shown in FIG.

In the liquid crystal unit 500 of this embodiment, when an error such as a radio wave error, a magnetic error, an illegal winning error, or a vibration error occurs in the corresponding P stand 2, the error occurring in the P stand 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 504. Notification is possible by display. When the power is turned on, the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 communicate with the information distribution server 901 to provide data for displaying each error (error display data) and the It is possible to acquire data (support data) for dealing with Specifically, the processing of CU3, liquid crystal unit 500, and information distribution server 901 when power is turned on to CU3 and liquid crystal unit 500 is as shown in FIG.

When the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 are powered on, the initial operation (initialization processing in the liquid crystal unit 500) is completed in the liquid crystal unit 500, and communication between the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 becomes possible ( After the liquid crystal unit 500 becomes able to return a connection response command in response to the connection request command of CU3), the liquid crystal unit control section 502 sends the information distribution server 901 from the P stand 2 corresponding to the liquid crystal unit 500 and CU3. An error display data request notification command including the transmitted main chip ID is transmitted.

26A, an error display data storage table shown in FIG. 26B, and support data shown in FIG. A storage table and are stored.

In the model identification table shown in FIG. 26A, main chip IDs (***-0001, ***-0002, * **-0101, ***-0102, etc.) are stored in association with each model information (model name such as XXX1, XXX2, etc.).

In the error display data storage table shown in FIG. 26(B), an error notification display for each type (type) of an error (e.g., radio wave error, magnetic error, fraudulent winning error, vibration error, etc.) occurring in the P platform 2 is displayed. Error display data (AAA1, AAA2, BBB1, BBB2, CCC1, CCC2, etc.) as identifiable error display information is associated with each model information (model name such as XXX1, XXX2, etc.). remembered. In other words, the error display data transmitted to the liquid crystal unit 500 when the various errors described above occur in the P unit 2 may differ from model to model. Therefore, the error display data storage table stores error display data corresponding to each model. Each error display data in this embodiment also includes an error code for each model.

In the support data storage table shown in FIG. 26(C), countermeasure information indicating countermeasures when an error (for example, a radio wave error, a magnetic error, an illegal prize winning error, a vibration error, etc.) occurs in the P machine 2 Support data (radio error support data for XXX1, radio error support data for XXX2, etc.) is stored in association with each model information (model name such as XXX1, XXX2, etc.). In other words, there are cases where the method of coping with the various errors that have occurred in the P machine 2 differs from model to model. Therefore, the support data storage table stores support data corresponding to each model.

In this embodiment, radio wave error, magnetic error, fraudulent prize winning error, and vibration error are described as examples of types of errors that may occur in the P platform 2, but the present invention is not limited to these. Errors of types other than the above that may occur in the P machine 2 (for example, model-specific errors) may be included, and such errors of types other than the above may be stored in the error display data storage table. Further, countermeasure information for errors of types other than the above may be stored in the support data storage table.

The model-specific errors include, for example, a specific area passage error in a gaming machine that controls to a jackpot game state when a game medium passes through a specific area, or a specific area passage error in a game machine that controls to a probability fluctuation state, and the second start region, including a sorting error in a gaming machine equipped with a sorting device having a sorting means for sorting.

When the information distribution server 901 receives the error display data request notification command from the liquid crystal unit 500, the information distribution server 901 determines the transmission destination of the error display data request notification command from the received main chip ID based on the model identification table shown in FIG. The model information of the P stand 2 corresponding to the liquid crystal unit 500 is specified. Then, based on the error display data storage table shown in FIG. 26B, the error display data corresponding to the specified model information is specified, and based on the support data storage table shown in FIG. Identify the support data corresponding to the model information.

Information distribution server 901 transmits the specified error display data and support data to liquid crystal unit 500, which is the transmission destination of the error display data request notification command. When the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the specified error display data and support data, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 stores the received error display data and support data as data corresponding to the P stand 2 corresponding to the liquid crystal unit 500 (not shown). (for example, RAM, etc.).

Next, processing in P stand 2 (main control board 16, payout control board 17), CU3 and liquid crystal unit 500 when an error occurs in P stand 2 is as shown in FIG.

When the main control unit 161 of the main control board 16 detects an error occurring in the P table 2 by the input signal from each sensor (winning sensor 162, radio wave sensor 163, vibration sensor 164, magnetic sensor 165), the error is detected and error detection information as error occurrence information capable of specifying the type of error that has occurred is sent to the payout control board 17, and an error detection notification command is sent to the effect control board 15. In the performance control board 15 that received the error detection notification command, the type of error that occurred is specified from the error detection notification command received by the performance control unit 151, and the error of the specified type occurs in the variable display device 278. Executes an error notification display indicating that

When the payout control unit 171 receives the error detection information and receives the state information request command from the CU 3 , the payout control unit 171 generates fraud detection information 1 that can identify the type of error specified from the error detection information received from the main control board 16. to CU3.

When the CU control unit 323 receives the state information response, it sends a state request command including amusement machine error information that can identify the type of error identified from the fraud detection information 1 included in the state information response to the liquid crystal unit 500. Send. After transmitting the status request command to the liquid crystal unit 500, the CU control unit 323 outputs the security signal corresponding to the type of error from one of the terminals set based on the terminal setting data described later. to run.

Although not shown in particular, the CU control unit 323 of the present embodiment is controlled to the big hit game state, that the variable display is started, and that it is controlled to the small hit game state as a phenomenon unique to the model. When receiving a status information response response containing game status data indicating that the received game status data has been controlled to a jackpot game status, that a variable display has started, or that a model-specific phenomenon has occurred It is determined which one is indicated, and each signal from the terminal according to the determination result (for example, all jackpot signal, security signal, start signal, model-specific signal, specific type jackpot signal, small hit signal, time-saving (continuous) Shochu) signal, prize ball number signal, prize ball planned number signal, special figure 1 start opening winning signal, special figure 2 starting opening winning signal, door open signal, out number signal) may be output.

When the status request command is received, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 identifies the type of error from the amusement machine error information included in the status request command, and refers to the RTC 507 to determine the time at which the status request command was received. specified as a time. Then, the types and times of these specified errors are added to and stored in the error storage table shown in FIG. In this way, every time the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the game machine error information from the CU 3, the type of error that has occurred at the P machine 2 is stored in the error storage table in chronological order. The history of errors that have occurred can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 .

Next, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 controls the liquid crystal display 504 using the error display data corresponding to the specified error type among the error display data received from the information distribution server 901 and stored when the power is turned on. An error notification display process is executed to display an error screen capable of identifying the type of error that has occurred and a countermeasure screen indicating how to deal with the error. Then, a status response command indicating that the error notification process has been executed is transmitted to CU3.

As described above, in this embodiment, when an error occurs in the P platform 2, not only is the error notification displayed on the variable display device 278 of the P platform 2, but also in the liquid crystal unit 500 corresponding to the P platform 2. , the error notification display corresponding to the model of the P machine 2 is displayed. can be accurately grasped at the place where is installed.

In addition, when a game machine not equipped with a display device such as the variable display device 278 of the P machine 2 is connected to the CU3, if an error occurs in the game machine, the clerk of the game arcade or the like will check the occurrence of the error. Since it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of an error, by executing an error notification display on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500, it is possible to improve the recognizability of the occurrence of the error.

Further, if the error display data is set by the management device, there is a possibility that an error may occur due to the work. By receiving and storing the display data, it is possible to omit the setting work and always perform accurate setting.

In addition, since not only the fact that an error has occurred in the P machine 2 but also information about how to deal with the error that has occurred is displayed, it is possible to quickly take appropriate action.

Further, in this embodiment, the error display data received from the information distribution server 901 is stored in the RAM of the liquid crystal unit 500 or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the error display data received from the information distribution server 901 can be stored in the EEPROM or the like of the liquid crystal unit 500 while the power is not turned on. However, after the stored contents are stored in a storage unit that can hold the stored content, the error display data stored in the storage unit may be used without receiving the error display data each time the device is started.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game information is acquired from the corresponding P machine 2 by the CU3 (specified from the received status information response response), part of the acquired game information Output is possible from any one of the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d. Then, the CU3 can set from which terminal the acquired game information is output based on the terminal setting data acquired from the owned ball management server 902 . Specifically, the processing of CU3 and ball management server 902 when CU3 is powered on is as shown in FIG.

First, when the CU3 is powered on, the gaming machine model code (indicating the model of the P machine 2) transmitted from the P machine 2 corresponding to CU3 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the ball management server 902. code) is sent.

A storage unit such as a RAM (not shown) of the ball management server 902 stores a terminal setting data storage table shown in FIG. In the terminal setting data storage table shown in FIG. 30, all jackpot signals, Security signal, start signal, model-specific signal, specific type jackpot signal, small hit signal, time-saving signal, number-of-balls signal, number-of-balls-scheduled-signal, special-figure 1 start-up prize-winning signal, special-figure 2 Terminal setting data assigned as a signal output by one of the start-up winning signal, door open signal, out number signal, and no signal assignment is stored in correspondence with the model indicated by the game machine model code of each P machine 2. It is The all jackpot signal is a signal that is output when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state on the P machine 2 regardless of the jackpot type, and the security signal is a signal that is generated by a radio wave error, vibration error, or the like on the P machine 2. A signal that is output when an error occurs. The start signal is a signal that is output each time a variable display is started on the P machine 2, and the model-specific signal is the model of the P machine 2, such as when a game ball passes through a specific area. It is a signal that is output when a unique phenomenon occurs, and the small hit signal is a signal that is output when the game state is controlled to the small hit game state on the P platform 2, Medium) signal is a signal that is output when the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (high base state) after the jackpot game ends at the P table 2, and the number of prize balls signal is a predetermined number of prize balls ( For example, 10 balls) are paid out, and the expected number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output for each predetermined number of expected prize balls (for example, 10 balls) when a game ball wins. , The special figure 1 starting opening winning signal is a signal that is output each time a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 275, 277, and the special figure 2 starting opening winning signal is a signal that is output to the starting winning opening 276 The door open signal is a signal output when the glass door 6 is opened. (For example, 10 balls) This signal is output each time the ball enters.

In this embodiment, signals that can be output from the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d include all jackpot signals, security signals, start signals, model-specific signals, specific type jackpot signals,
Small hit signal, time-saving medium signal, number of prize balls signal, planned number of prize balls signal, special figure 1 starting entrance winning signal, special figure 2 starting entrance winning signal, door open signal, number of out signals, signal allocation None is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to these signals, the number of shots of game balls, whether or not variable display is in progress, and the intensity of shots of game balls. , a signal indicating ON/OFF of the firing stop button 20 may be provided as a signal that can be output from the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d.

For example, in the terminal setting data storage table shown in FIG. 30, the all-jack signal is assigned to the first terminal 333a, the security signal is assigned to the second terminal 333b, the start signal is assigned to the third terminal 333c, and the model-specific signal is assigned to the fourth terminal 333d. Terminal setting data 1 corresponding to the model XXX1, the start signal to the first terminal 333a, the all jackpot signal to the second terminal 333b, the security signal to the third terminal 333c, and the no signal to the fourth terminal 333d. Terminal setting corresponding to model XXX3 assigned corresponding terminal setting data 2, a security signal to the first terminal 333a, no signal to the second terminal 333b, a start signal to the third terminal 333c, and a model-specific signal to the fourth terminal 333d. Terminal setting data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of P units 2 such as data 3 is stored.

Also, on the display screen of the display device of the ball management server 902, a setting screen (menu screen) for inputting terminal setting data corresponding to each model can be displayed. By doing so, the contents of the terminal setting data can be set (changed).

For example, as shown in FIG. 31, a plurality of tabs such as data 1, data 2, data 3, data 4, . By selecting one of them, a setting screen for predetermined terminal setting data is displayed.

The setting screen includes setting areas corresponding to the first terminal 333a, the second terminal 333b, the third terminal 333c, and the fourth terminal 333d. Each setting area has an input area corresponding to "all jackpot signal", an input area corresponding to "security signal", an input area corresponding to "start signal", an input area corresponding to "model specific signal", and an input area corresponding to "specific Input area corresponding to "type big hit signal", input area corresponding to "small hit signal", input area corresponding to "time saving (during consecutive) signal", input area corresponding to "number of prize balls signal", " Input area corresponding to "Predicted Number of Prize Balls Signal", Input Area Corresponding to "Special Figure 1 Starting Entrance Winning Signal", Input Area Corresponding to "Special Figure 2 Starting Entrance Winning Signal", Corresponding to "Door Open Signal" An input area, an input area corresponding to "out number signal", and an input area corresponding to "no signal assignment" are displayed, and By clicking the input area corresponding to the signal to be assigned from among the input areas displayed in the corresponding setting area, one signal to be assigned to each terminal can be individually set. In addition, in FIG. 31, the input area displayed in black indicates the selected input area.

Then, by selecting one of the input areas in each of the first terminal 333a, the second terminal 333b, the third terminal 333c, and the fourth terminal 333d, the selection of the "determine" area at the bottom right of the setting screen is enabled, By clicking the activated "determine" area, the data content of the selected terminal setting data is stored. In addition, all jackpot signals, security signals, start signals, model-specific signals, specific type jackpot signals, small hit signals, time-saving (consecutive) signals, number of prize balls signal, planned number of prize balls signal, special 1 starter Winning signal, special figure 2 starting opening winning signal, door open signal, out number signal is selected at two or more terminals out of the first terminal 333a, the second terminal 333b, the third terminal 333c and the fourth terminal 333d In this case, the "determination" area is not validated, so that the data contents of the selected terminal setting data cannot be stored.

Also, when the "reset" area on the right side of the "determine" area is clicked, the initial setting data in the terminal setting data (for example, the first terminal 333a is "all jackpot signal", the second terminal 333b is "security signal", the third A "start signal" is stored in the terminal 333c, and a "model specific signal" is stored in the fourth terminal 333d. Alternatively, clicking the "reset" area may only select the signal corresponding to the initialization data, and then clicking the "determine" area may cause the initialization data to be stored.

Returning to FIG. 29, when the terminal setting data request command is received from the CU3, the ball management server 902 extracts the model information (the model of the P machine 2) from the gaming machine model code included in the received terminal setting data request command. Then, based on the terminal setting data storage table shown in FIG. 30, the terminal setting data corresponding to the specified model is specified. Then, a terminal setting data response command including the specified terminal setting data is transmitted to the CU3 to which the terminal setting data request command is transmitted.

When receiving the terminal setting data from the ball management server 902, the CU control unit 323 controls the first terminal 333a, the second terminal 333b, and the third terminal 333c of the external output ports 1 to 4 based on the received terminal setting data. and the fourth terminal 333d are assigned and set the types of signals to be output.

Thus, in this embodiment, even if the game board of the P machine 2 connected to the CU3 is replaced, the first terminal 333a and the second terminal 333b of the external output ports 1 to 4 of the P machine 2 , the third terminal 333c and the fourth terminal 333d can be set by assigning the types of signals to be output, respectively, so that the work of connecting the signal lines can be saved.

In particular, in an enclosed game machine like this embodiment, terminals are provided on the CU3, and depending on the manufacturer of the P machine 2 (game board 26) and the specifications of the P machine 2, Since the information to be output to the outside and the information to be collected at the hall (game hall) side are different, if the wiring is reconnected with the replacement of the game board 26, the workability at the time of replacement of the game board 26 is significantly reduced. . On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, terminal setting data can be obtained and set from the ball management server 902 using communication, thereby improving the workability at the time of replacing the game board 26. can be done.

In addition, since the terminal setting data can be acquired from the ball-handling management server 902, which is an external device, it is not necessary to set the terminal setting data in the CU3 each time the model of the P table 2 is changed, thereby saving labor.

In addition, the ball management server 902 stores terminal setting data in association with the model information of the P machine 2, and the CU3 stores model information as model information stored in the main control unit 161 that controls the progress of the game. Since the main chip ID is transmitted to the ball management server 902 and the terminal setting data stored in association with the model information is acquired, a signal of a type corresponding to the model of the P machine 2 can be set.

Further, the ball-handling management server 902 is provided in the game hall where the P machines 2 are installed, and the terminal setting data can be updated in the ball-handling management server 902, so that the game hall can update the terminal setting data. can be updated accordingly.

In addition, the ball management server 902 is provided in the game hall where the P table 2 is installed, and the individual output setting information (the first terminal 333a, the first terminal 333a, the second terminal on the terminal setting screen shown in FIG. Terminal setting data set by selecting one of the input areas in the setting areas corresponding to the 2nd terminal 333b, the 3rd terminal 333c and the 4th terminal 333d respectively), and the general output setting information (Fig. 31), and whether the terminal setting data acquired by the CU 3 is general output setting information or individual output setting information. Being configurable, the gaming facility can select (set) which of the general output setting information and the individual output setting information to use.

In addition, CU3 is provided with a plurality of terminals corresponding to each of signal output ports 1 to 4 and to which signal lines can be connected. It functions as the signal type setting means for setting . By doing so, there is no need to provide separate signal type setting means, and the manufacturing cost of the game device can be reduced.

Next, the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) stored in CU3 and the game information storage table stored in liquid crystal unit 500 (FIG. 34B) will be described. A RAM (not shown) of the CU control unit 323 stores a game information storage table for storing game information on the P table 2 to which the CU 3 corresponds, as shown in FIG. 34(A). The RAM (not shown) of the liquid crystal unit control section 502 stores a game information storage table for storing the game information acquired (specified from the state request command) received from the CU 3, as shown in FIG. 34(B). It is Further, in the liquid crystal unit 500, the display on the liquid crystal display 504 can be updated based on the game information stored in the game information storage table (game information storage table on the side of the liquid crystal unit 500) shown in FIG. 34(B). ing.

Therefore, the same game information is stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side (see FIG. 34A) and the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side (see FIG. 34B). ing. However, if you want to initialize the display on the liquid crystal display 504 for reasons such as connecting the liquid crystal unit 500 to another CU 3, clear the contents of the game information storage table on the side of the liquid crystal unit 500 (see FIG. 34(B)). However, the display on the liquid crystal display 504 cannot be properly initialized unless the contents of the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side are also cleared.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the display of the liquid crystal display device 504 is initialized, the content of the game information storage table (see FIG. 34B) on the liquid crystal unit 500 side and the game information storage on the liquid crystal unit 500 side are initialized. Both the contents of the table and the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side are cleared. The processing of CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 when initializing the display of the liquid crystal display 504 will be described below.

First, as shown in FIG. 32, when the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 are powered on, the liquid crystal unit 500 (liquid crystal unit control section 502 ) starts an initial operation for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 504 . In addition, CU3 (CU control unit 323) repeatedly transmits a connection request including data of the serial number of CU3 to liquid crystal unit 500. FIG.

Then, when the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the connection request command after the initial operation is finished, it identifies the serial number of the CU3 from the connection request command and stores it in a RAM (not shown). Further, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 transmits a connection response command to CU3.

Upon receiving the connection response command, the CU control unit 323 determines that the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 are communicably connected, and issues an operation history request command including the serial number of the CU3, the operation history management serial number, and game information data. is transmitted to the liquid crystal unit 500 . The game state data included in the operation history request command is the game data acquired and stored by the CU3 from the P machine 2 through the transmission and reception of the state request command and the state response response between the CU3 and the P machine 2. It is data such as the number of shot balls and the number of big hits. Furthermore, the CU control section 323 transmits the chip number of the payout control section 171 of the P stand 2 corresponding to the CU3 to the liquid crystal unit 500 .

When the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the operation history request command and the game machine connection notification command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 sends a game machine connection response command to CU3 indicating that the liquid crystal unit 500 is connected to the P machine 2 via CU3. to send.

Upon receiving the gaming table connection response command, the CU control section 323 transmits a start-up notification command to the liquid crystal unit 500 . Upon receiving the start-up notification command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 controls the liquid crystal display control section 503 to display a start-up screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display 504 indicating that the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 have started up (activated). is displayed, and a startup response command is sent to CU3.

Upon receiving the startup response command, the CU control unit 323 transmits a standby display notification command to the liquid crystal unit 500 . Upon receiving the standby display notification command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 controls the liquid crystal display control section 503 so that the liquid crystal display unit 504 is in standby mode because no card (member card or visitor card) or banknote is inserted in the liquid crystal display unit 504 at CU3. A waiting screen (described later) is displayed to indicate that it is in progress. Then, liquid crystal unit control section 502 transmits a standby display response command to CU3.

After the CU control unit 323 receives the standby display response command, when a card (membership card or visitor card) is inserted into the card insertion/ejection port 309, the CU control unit 323 outputs the card to the card reader/writer. Based on the information read in 337, a card information notification command including data such as the prepaid balance, the number of game balls, the number of balls held, etc. is transmitted to the liquid crystal unit 500. FIG.

Upon receiving the card information notification command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 controls the liquid crystal display control section 503 based on the data specified from the card information notification command, and displays the card insertion screen on the liquid crystal display 504 . Liquid crystal unit control section 502 then transmits a card information response command to CU3.

As shown in FIG. 36, the card insertion screen includes a player's avatar image, a menu button that displays items that can be selected by the player, etc., and a menu button that is operated by the player, etc. A leave button for switching the screen of the liquid crystal display 504 to a screen indicating that the player is away, and a return button for returning the card inserted in the CU3 to the CU3 when operated by the player or the like. , a ball lending button for causing the CU3 to lend game balls by the operation of a player, etc., the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the number of probability changes, the number of starts, the probability of big wins, the balls owned by the player on the day This is a screen on which the number (number of balls held), the number of game balls, and the number of stored balls are displayed. The waiting screen includes an avatar image, a menu button, a leaving button, a return button, a ball rental button, the number of big hits, the number of small wins, the number of odds, the number of starts, and the probability of big wins, just like the card insertion screen shown in FIG. This is a screen in which the number of balls held and the number of stored balls are not displayed while the number of balls is displayed.

After the CU control unit 323 receives the card information response command, the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 execute a lending sequence for performing processing related to lending game balls according to the player's operation.

As shown in FIG. 33, after execution of the lending sequence, in CU3 and liquid crystal unit 500, CU3 stores the game information, the movement history management serial number, the number of shots stored in the game information storage table shown in FIG. A state request command including table data clear state (none) data indicating that the table data, which is game information such as the number of big hits, the number of probability variations, and the number of starts, is not cleared is transmitted to the liquid crystal unit 500.例文帳に追加Upon receiving the state request command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 updates the operating history information based on the received state request command, and updates the contents of the game information storage table for initializing the display of the liquid crystal display 504. A state response command including the data of the table data clear instruction (none) indicating that there is no clear instruction is sent to CU3.

In addition, when the CU control unit 323 acquires game information including data such as shooting of game balls at the P machine 2 from the P machine 2, the CU control unit 323 stores a RAM (not shown) of the CU control unit 323 based on the acquired game information. (for example, the number of shots, the number of big hits, the number of variable probability, the number of starts, etc. shown in FIG. 34A) are updated. Then, it transmits to the liquid crystal unit 500 a state request command including game information including data such as the shooting of game balls, a movement history management serial number, and data indicating a table data clear state (none).

Upon receiving the state request command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 stores the game information in the RAM (not shown) of the liquid crystal unit control section 502 based on the game information including the data such as the shooting of the game ball specified from the state request command. The contents of the game information storage table (for example, the number of shots shown in FIG. 34B, the number of big hits, the number of probability variations, the number of starts, etc.) are updated. Then, between the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500, a state request command including game information including data such as the shooting of game balls, a movement history management serial number, and data indicating a table data clear state (none), and a table data clear state are transmitted. Repeatedly send and receive a status response command containing (none) data.

Next, when the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives, for example, from the information distribution server 901 an instruction (signal or command) to clear the contents of the game information storage table for initializing the display of the liquid crystal display device 504, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 The game information storage table on the 500 side (see FIG. 34(B)) and the operation history response data are cleared. Then, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 sends a state response including the data of the table data clear instruction (present) indicating that there is an instruction to clear the table data in the contents of the game information storage table for initializing the display of the liquid crystal display 504. Send command to CU3.

When the CU control section 323 receives a state response command including data indicating the machine data clear instruction (present) from the liquid crystal unit 500, the CU control section 323 clears the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side. That is, in this embodiment, when the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives an instruction to clear the contents of the game information storage table from the information distribution server 901, the contents of the game information storage table on the side of the liquid crystal unit 500 are first cleared, Next, the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side are cleared.

During the clearing of the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side, a state request command including data indicating the movement history management serial number and the table data clear state (none) and the table data clear state are exchanged between the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500. Repeatedly send and receive a status response command containing status (present) data. In particular, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 repeatedly transmits to CU3 a status response command including data indicating the machine data clear status (yes) until the clearing of the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side is completed.

Furthermore, when the CU control unit 323 acquires new game information from the P machine 2 while the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side are being cleared, the CU control unit 323 stores the acquired game information as the game information on the CU3 side. Clear without storing in the memory table. As described above, in this embodiment, if the game information changes while the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side are being cleared, new game information is not stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side. It is possible to prevent the storage contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side and the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side from being different, thereby preventing inappropriate display on the liquid crystal display 504.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the gaming information storage table on the CU 3 side stores gaming information including the number of shots of game balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability variations, the number of starts, etc., but the present invention is limited to this. The game information stored in the game information storage table on the CU 3 side may include the game state of the P machine 2 . In this way, if the game information stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side includes the game state of the P machines 2, the CU control unit 323 will change the state of the P machines while the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side are cleared. 2 indicates that the game state of the P machine 2 has changed, the acquired game information may be cleared without being stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side.

As described above, in this embodiment, the change in the game information or the game state of the P machine 2 under an unstable situation such as during the clearing of the contents of the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side is stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side, a discrepancy occurs between the stored contents of the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 (the stored contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side and the stored contents of the liquid crystal unit 500 side). CU3 and liquid crystal unit 500 can be prevented from inconsistent storage contents, and game information can be managed more appropriately between CU3 and liquid crystal unit 500. FIG.

When the clearing of the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side is completed, the CU control unit 323 changes the movement history management serial number and the machine data clear state ( (completion) is transmitted to the liquid crystal unit 500 . Thus, the processing for clearing the contents of the game information storage table on the CU3 side and the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side is completed.

Next, the display mode on the screen of the liquid crystal display 504 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the screen of the liquid crystal display 504 includes a player's avatar image, a menu button for displaying items that can be selected by the player or the like by being operated by the player or the like, and an item operated by the player or the like. A return button for switching the screen of the liquid crystal display 504 to a screen indicating that the player is away from the seat, and a return button for returning the card inserted in the CU3 to the CU3 by the operation of the player or the like. A button, a ball lending button for causing the CU 3 to lend game balls when operated by the player, etc. The number of balls (number of balls held), the number of game balls, and the number of stored balls are displayed. Furthermore, below the number of game balls, a shooting intensity gauge indicating the shooting intensity of the game balls on the P table 2 is displayed.

Also, on the right side of the number of balls held on the day, there is a button to switch between displaying and hiding the number of balls held on the day, and on the left of the number of balls held on the day , CU3 displays a payout button for paying out part of the number of balls held (for example, 125 balls) as game balls. Furthermore, on the right side of the stored ball number, a stored ball number display/non-display switching button for switching display/non-display of the stored ball number is displayed. A replay button is displayed for paying out part (for example, 125 balls) as game balls.

In addition, at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 504, the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the winning slot, the balance based on the amount received at CU3, the number of game balls that can be borrowed with the balance, the player, etc. A game guide button that, when operated, switches the screen of the liquid crystal display 504 to a screen explaining the game method, etc., on the P stand 2 to which the CU 3 is connected, and the operation method of the liquid crystal unit 500 is changed by the player, etc. An operation explanation button is displayed to switch to the explanation screen.

Next, the error notification function and error history display function of the liquid crystal unit 500 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. On the variable display device 278, for example, an error display of "Please call the staff! E-33 prize ball abnormal error, please turn on the power again" is displayed as shown in FIG. A state information response including the data of the fraud detection information 1 including the error code (E-33) is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3.

In response to receiving this status information response, the CU control unit 323 of the CU3 sends a status request command including gaming machine error information indicating the type of error identified from the fraud detection information 1 data to the liquid crystal unit 500. to send.

In response to receiving the status request command from CU3, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives the error type and error code included in the received status request command (amusement table error information), and the time data obtained from the RTC 507 at that time. is additionally stored as a new error history, and an error notification display corresponding to the model of the corresponding P machine 2, for example, an error notification display of "abnormal prize ball error" is received in advance from the information distribution server 901 and stored. Based on the specified error display data, as shown in FIG. Please!” and the menu display of “Call” are displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 by instructing the liquid crystal display control unit 503 to display the error notification screen superimposed on the display screen of the operating mode. It reports that an error has occurred in the P machine 2 and the type of error that has occurred.

When the player operates the "call" menu display on this error notification screen, the operation is detected by the liquid crystal unit control section 502, and a call request command is transmitted to the CU3. In response to the reception of this call request command, CU control unit 323 outputs a call signal to call lamp 1000 connected thereto, thereby lighting call lamp 1000 . In this case, by outputting an error call signal different from the normal call signal to the call lamp 1000, the lighting mode of the call lamp 1000 is different from the normal call lighting mode and corresponds to the error. By turning on the call lamp 1000, the game hall clerk may be able to confirm that an error has occurred from a place away from the liquid crystal unit 500. FIG.

Further, when the liquid crystal unit control unit 502 detects an operation to display the "call" menu, the "call" menu is displayed so that the operation to the "call" menu display is not repeated. Instead, as shown in FIG. 39A, the flashing display of "calling" is executed for a predetermined period, and when the predetermined period has passed, the flashing display of "calling" is terminated.

When the call lamp 1000 is turned on in this way, the staff of the amusement arcade rushes in and asks for the contents of the error notification screen displayed on the liquid crystal unit 500 and the contents displayed on the variable display device 278 of the P table 2. By confirming that the error contents are the same, it is possible to confirm whether the error type is correct.

In addition, as an error of the installed equipment, there are also errors due to malfunctions of the variable display device 278 and its peripheral devices, and malfunctions of the power supply circuit and power supply wiring. error display may not be displayed on the variable display device 278, but even in such a case, according to this embodiment, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 displays the original display as shown in FIG. , a display corresponding to the same error type as the error type displayed on the variable display device 278, that is, although the error type differs depending on the model of the P machine 2, a display corresponding to the model of the P machine 2 is displayed. , and the type of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

In addition, as the error of the P table 2, not only one error but also a plurality of errors may occur in succession. For example, as shown in FIG. Then, if another error occurs while the error notification screen for the abnormal prize ball error is being displayed, as shown in FIG. By updating the display so that the error code is sequentially displayed below the display of the error type and the error code of the error that occurred earlier, the content of the error that occurred earlier will not be unknown. It's like

In this embodiment, when a plurality of errors occur consecutively, the type of each error and the error code of each error are all displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the last error that occurred may be displayed. For example, if the priority of each error can be specified by describing the priority of each error in the error display information , the error notification screen that notifies the error that occurred first is changed to the error notification screen that notifies the error that has newly occurred only when the error that occurred later has a higher priority than the error that occurred earlier. You may do so. However, even when the error notification screen is changed to the error notification screen of the error with the higher priority, if the previous error is an error that causes the game to be stopped on the P machine 2, the error notification will notify the newly generated error. By preventing the screen from being changed, an error that causes the game to be stopped on the P machine 2 may not become unrecognizable.

After confirming the occurrence of the error and the type of the error, if the clerk wants to confirm how to deal with the error that has occurred, he/she can perform a check operation (operation of the support display button) on the remote control that the clerk has. By the confirming operation, the remote controller transmits an infrared support display instruction signal.

This support display instruction signal is received by infrared light receiving section 324 provided in CU 3 , and based on this reception, CU control section 323 transmits a support display request command to liquid crystal unit 500 .

In response to the reception of this support display request command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives and stores in advance the display contents of "cause" and "coping method" corresponding to the stored error code from the information distribution server 901. 39(B) shows a support display screen including the specified "cause" and "measure" and the display of the error type corresponding to the error code. Then, the liquid crystal display control 503 is instructed to display on the liquid crystal display 504 superimposed on the display screen of the business mode.

Specifically, if the error code is (E-33), for example, "Abnormal prize ball error" is displayed at the top of the support display screen, and the error code is displayed in the "Cause" item below it. The cause message "An abnormal prize ball has occurred due to an abnormal prize winning during the game" described in the support data in association with a certain (E-33) is displayed, and the item "Remedy" below it is displayed. , which is described in the support data in association with the error code (E-33) "1; Please confirm that fraud has not been carried out. 2; Turn off the pachinko machine and restart it. please” message is displayed.

In other words, in the support data of the present embodiment, the data of the cause message and the countermeasure message are described in association with the corresponding error code of the model of the P unit 2, and the error code corresponds to the error of the error code. It is possible to specify the corresponding cause message and solution message.

In addition, the display of these support display screens is erased when a predetermined display end condition such as the clerk operating the remote controller or the elapse of a predetermined display time is met, and can be erased by anyone other than the clerk. In addition, it is designed to prevent the support information from being inadvertently learned.

Further, in this embodiment, the support display screen is displayed only by operating the remote control possessed by the clerk so that the detailed information on the coping method is not known by anyone other than the clerk. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , the support display screen may be displayed according to the operation of the menu.

As shown in FIG. 38B, when an error notification screen for notifying the occurrence of a plurality of errors is displayed, if an operation for confirming a coping method is performed on the remote controller, each error will be is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error notification screen for notifying the occurrence of a plurality of errors is displayed, the support display screens are switched to display all the support display screens for the errors that have occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display only the support display screen for the most recent error that occurred, or if priority is set for the error, the priority Only the support display screens with high errors may be displayed.

In addition, when the clerk wants to check what kind of error has occurred on the day when canceling the error, etc., the error history display operation (error history display button operation), and an infrared error history display instruction signal is transmitted from the remote controller by the error history display operation.

As shown in FIG. 40, this error history display instruction signal is received by the infrared light receiving section 324 provided in the CU3. send to.

In response to the reception of this error history display request command, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 reads out the stored data of the error history of the current day and instructs the liquid crystal display control 503 to display the error history screen shown in FIG. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 superimposed on the display screen of the mode.

Specifically, as the error history, as shown in FIG. 41, the error code, error type, and occurrence time are displayed for each error, and the most recent error is arranged at the top. displayed.

In this way, the error history screen is displayed on the liquid crystal unit 500 by the clerk's operation of the remote control, so that what kind of error has occurred in the P stand 2 on the day, or whether no error has occurred. If a similar error occurs repeatedly, it can be grasped that the problem has not been resolved even if the error is dealt with, so that the corresponding P unit 2 It is possible to quickly determine countermeasures such as stopping the operation of

In this embodiment, the error history screen displays the error code, error type, and time of occurrence. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The items may be set as appropriate, and the contents and items to be displayed on the error history screen may be selected by the gaming facility.

In addition, the error history screen of this embodiment is erased when a predetermined display termination condition such as the operation of the remote control by the clerk or the elapse of a predetermined display time is met, as with the support display screen described above. It's like

As described above, in the gaming system having the P stand 2, the CU 3 provided corresponding to the P stand 2, and the liquid crystal unit 500, the CU 3 generates all jackpot signals, Security signal, start signal, model-specific signal, specific type jackpot signal, small hit signal, time-saving signal, number-of-balls signal, number-of-balls-scheduled-signal, special-figure 1 start-up prize-winning signal, special-figure 2 Terminals can be set to output the starting gate winning signal, door open signal, number of out signals, etc. to an external device, so wiring work for outputting each signal can be saved.

In addition, in this embodiment, CU3, based on the terminal setting data acquired from the ball management server 902 which is an external device, all jackpot signals, security signals, start signals, model-specific signals, specific type jackpot signals, small hit signals Signal, time-saving (Renzou) signal, number of prize balls signal, planned number of prize balls signal, special figure 1 starting entrance winning signal, special figure 2 starting entrance winning signal, door open signal, out number signal etc. to external device Since it is possible to set the terminal for outputting to the P unit 2, it is possible to set the type of signal corresponding to the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d according to the model of the P unit 2. FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by operating the ball management server 902 provided in the game hall, such as a store clerk of the game hall, the type corresponding to the terminals (first terminal 333a to fourth terminal 333d) for each model Since it is possible to update the terminal setting data, which is the setting data of the signals, the contents of the terminal setting data can be updated as appropriate on the game arcade side. In particular, in this embodiment, by operating the ball management server 902 provided in the game hall by a game hall clerk or the like, pre-stored initial setting data (general output setting information) and the data set by the clerk himself/herself are displayed. Since either of the data (individual output information) can be used as terminal setting data, more detailed terminal setting can be performed according to the game hall and model.

In addition, in this embodiment, by functioning as the signal type setting means for setting the type of the signal output by the CU control unit 323, there is no need to separately provide the signal type setting means in the CU3, and the manufacturing cost of the CU3 is reduced. can be reduced.

In this embodiment, by transmitting an error display data request signal from the CU3 to the information distribution server 901, the liquid crystal unit 500 acquires the error display data of the P stand 2 provided corresponding to the CU3, When an error occurs in the P platform 2, the error display data obtained from the information distribution server 901 is used to detect the error occurring in the P platform 2 in the liquid crystal unit 500 (the liquid crystal display device 504 included in the liquid crystal unit 500). Therefore, the liquid crystal unit 500 provided outside the P unit 2 can also display an error information display corresponding to the model of the P unit 2 .

Further, in this embodiment, the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) stored in the CU control unit 323 and the game information storage table stored in the liquid crystal unit control unit 502 are stored. By clearing the game information stored in (see FIG. 34(B)) based on the receipt of the machine data clear instruction, the game information is stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(A)) on the CU3 side. It is possible to prevent inappropriate information from being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 504 by not properly erasing the displayed game information.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) stored in the CU control unit 323 based on the reception of the machine data clear instruction in the liquid crystal unit 500 and the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) stored in the liquid crystal unit control section 502 are exemplified. If such information is not displayed, the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) stored in the CU control unit 323 and the game information stored in the liquid crystal unit control unit 502 Part of the game information stored in the storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) may not be cleared.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, while the liquid crystal display 504 is displaying the notification of an error that has occurred in the P unit 2, a new error of a different type (kind) occurs in the P unit 2. When an error occurs, a plurality of errors, including a newly occurring error, are displayed on the liquid crystal display 504. Therefore, even if errors of different types occur at the same time, the liquid crystal display is displayed on the liquid crystal display 504. The occurrence of each error can be recognized from the device 504 .

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when the liquid crystal display 504 is displaying an error that has occurred at the P table 2, the liquid crystal display can be displayed by operating the remote control by the store clerk of the amusement arcade or the like. Since it is possible to display the method of coping with the error on the device 504, the store clerk at the game parlor can quickly take appropriate measures by referring to the method of coping with the error that has occurred at the P machine 2. can be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the notification of the error that occurred in the P unit 2 is being displayed on the liquid crystal display 504, the menu of "call" is displayed along with the notification of the error, and the "call" is displayed. Since the call lamp 1000 is turned on to call the store clerk of the game parlor based on the operation of the menu display, the calling operation can be performed while confirming the contents of the error by the error notification display.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, when the liquid crystal unit 500 receives a machine data clear instruction from the information distribution server 901, the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side (see FIG. 34(B)) is processed. , and then clear the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side, simplifying the processing related to clearing these table data. can be

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 clears the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34B) on the liquid crystal unit 500 side. Until the CU3 receives a state request command including data indicating that the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side has been cleared, the table data clear state (completion) data is received. Erasing the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side by transmitting a status response response including the data of the repeating board data clear instruction (yes) to the CU3. can be done more reliably. In this embodiment, after clearing the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) on the liquid crystal unit 500 side, the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(A)) on the CU3 side is cleared. ) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. After clearing the information, the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34B) on the liquid crystal unit 500 side may be cleared.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the CU control section 323 transmits to the liquid crystal unit 500 a state request command including data indicating the table data clear state (with or without), and the liquid crystal unit control section 502 , when the data of the machine data clear state (no) is received, the data of the machine data clear instruction (yes) is transmitted to the CU3 by transmitting the status response command including the data of the machine data clear instruction (yes). can be ensured to be received at CU3.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, by transmitting a table data clear instruction from the information distribution server 901 to the liquid crystal unit 500, the game information storage table (see FIG. 34A) on the CU3 side and the Since the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) on the liquid crystal unit 500 side can be cleared, it is not necessary for the store clerk or the like to directly operate the CU3 or the liquid crystal unit 500. Therefore, the work efficiency for clearing the display on the liquid crystal display 504 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the game information stored in the game information storage table on the CU3 side (see FIG. 34A) and the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side (see FIG. 34B) is cleared. In order to clear the table data, the information distribution server 901 transmits the machine data clear instruction to the liquid crystal unit 500 as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the management computer 900, the ball management server 902, the T-BOX 904, etc., transmit a machine data clear instruction to the liquid crystal unit 500, and the game information storage table on the CU3 side (see FIG. 34A) and the liquid crystal unit 500 side The game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) may be cleared. In addition, the game machine management server 802 and the content management server 903, etc., provided outside the game arcade transmit a machine data clear instruction to the liquid crystal unit 500 to clear the game information storage table on the CU3 side (see FIG. 34A). and the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side (see FIG. 34(B)).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the terminal setting data for each model of each P machine 2 is stored in the ball management server 902, and the CU 3 receives the P machines from the ball management server 902. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hall server 801, management computer 900, information distribution server 901, T - BOX 904, key management server 800, game machine management server 802, content management server 903, settlement server 905, etc. provided outside the game hall store terminal setting data for each model of each P machine 2, and CU 3 stores these The terminal setting data corresponding to the model of the P machine 2 to which the CU 3 corresponds may be obtained from a server or computer other than the ball management server 902 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the CU3, which is the gaming device of the present invention, has a total jackpot signal, a security signal, a start signal, a model-specific signal, a specific-type jackpot signal, a small win signal, a time-saving (continuous) signal, and a prize. Outside having a first terminal 333a to a fourth terminal 333d capable of outputting the number of balls signal, the planned number of prize balls signal, the special figure 1 start opening prize signal, the special figure 2 start opening prize signal, the door opening signal, the out number signal etc. Although the form in which the end output section 331 is provided has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The outer end output section 331 may be provided on the substrate 16 or other control substrate).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the CU3, which is the gaming device of the present invention, has a total jackpot signal, a security signal, a start signal, a model-specific signal, a specific-type jackpot signal, a small win signal, a time-saving (continuous) signal, and a prize. Outside having a first terminal 333a to a fourth terminal 333d capable of outputting the number of balls signal, the planned number of prize balls signal, the special figure 1 start opening prize signal, the special figure 2 start opening prize signal, the door opening signal, the out number signal etc. Although the form in which the end output portion 331 is provided is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer end output portion 331 may be provided with three or less or four or more terminals. In particular, even if all the signals disclosed in the present invention can be output to the outside from the outer end output section 331 by providing the outer end output section 331 with, for example, 16 terminals, which are more than the number of signals that can be output. good.

In the above-described embodiment, the liquid crystal unit 500 stores the error type, the error code, and the time of error occurrence in the P unit 2 as the error occurrence history in the P unit 2 to which the liquid crystal unit 500 corresponds. is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the error type, error code, and error occurrence time may be stored as the error occurrence history.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine in which the CU 3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 in the gaming system of the present invention are provided correspondingly was exemplified as an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine (P machine 2). The game machine provided with the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 may be a slot machine without being limited to this.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment has been exemplified in which the ball lending button is highlighted on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 provided corresponding to the enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine (P machine 2), but the present invention. is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 provided corresponding to the type of pachinko game machine that does not circulate the game balls inside by paying out the game balls to the outside such as the upper tray. , the ball rental button may be highlighted.

As described above, in the gaming device and the gaming system including the gaming device according to the present invention, the output setting information acquiring means acquires the output setting information from the external device (for example, the CU control unit 323 is a part that acquires terminal setting data from the ball management server 902 as an external device provided in the game hall), so output setting information can be acquired from the external device.

Further, the external device stores the output setting information in association with the model information of the game machine (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, terminal setting data is associated with each model in a terminal setting data storage table). ), the output setting information acquisition means transmits the model information stored in the game control means for controlling the progress of the game to the external device, and stores it in association with the model information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the CU control unit 323 transmits the game machine model code stored in the main control unit 161 to the ball management server 902, and 902 is a part for acquiring terminal setting data specified based on the model of the P machine 2 indicated by the gaming machine model code), so that a signal of a type corresponding to the model of the gaming machine can be set.

Further, the external device is provided in a game hall where the game machine is installed, and the output setting information can be updated in the external device (for example, as shown in FIG. etc., update each terminal setting data by operating the ball management server 902 provided in the game hall), so the game hall can appropriately update the output setting information.

In addition, the external device is provided in the game hall where the game machine is installed, and the individual output setting information by the game hall (for example, as shown in FIG. Terminal setting data set by operating the management server 902) and general output setting information (for example, initial setting data) independent of the game hall can be stored, and the output setting information acquisition means acquires Either the general output setting information or the individual output setting information can be set as the output setting information to be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. By clicking the area, the terminal setting data set by the game arcade clerk or the like operating the ball management server 902 is stored, and by clicking the "reset" area, the initial setting data is stored). , the game center can set whether to use the general output setting information or the individual output setting information.

In addition, the gaming device is provided with a plurality of external terminals to which signal lines can be connected (for example, the first terminal 333a to the fourth terminal 333d). The portion where the outer end output section 331 is provided in the CU3), the control means for controlling the game device functions as the signal type setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the CU control section 323 may When a status information response including detection information 1 is received, a security signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the allocation setting performed based on the terminal setting data), so there is no need to separately provide signal type setting means. , the manufacturing cost of the game device can be reduced.

In addition, the display control means can execute control for simultaneously displaying different error notification displays specified by the error notification display specification means on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 38, a liquid crystal display 504 If a new error occurs while the error notification screen is being displayed, a message indicating that a new error has occurred is additionally displayed on the error notification screen). can be notified of the occurrence of

In addition, the game device includes coping information specifying means (for example, liquid crystal unit control as shown in FIG. 39) for specifying coping information (for example, support data) corresponding to the type of error specified from the error occurrence information. a portion for specifying the support data previously received and stored by the unit 502 from the information distribution server 901), and the display control means displays the countermeasure information specified by the countermeasure information specifying means on the display means. Control can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 39(B), a part that executes support display on the liquid crystal display 504 based on the specified support data), so information on coping with the error that has occurred is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly take appropriate measures.

Further, the display means has an operation reception means (for example, a liquid crystal display 504 having a touch panel) capable of receiving the operation of the player, and the display control means controls the display of the call display together with the error notification display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (B2), the liquid crystal unit control unit 502 displays "A prize ball abnormality error (E-33) has occurred in the game machine. Please call a staff member!" (a portion for displaying an error notification screen including a menu display of "call"), the gaming device transmits a predetermined call signal to an external call when an operation corresponding to the call display is received by the operation receiving means. Call signal output means capable of outputting to a device (for example, call lamp 1000) (for example, when the player operates the "call" menu display, the operation is detected by the liquid crystal unit control section 502, and the CU control section 323 outputs a call signal to the call lamp 1000 connected to the CU3), it is possible to perform a call operation while confirming the contents of the error by the error notification display.

Also, the erasing is performed by the second control means before the first control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the game information storage table on the liquid crystal unit 500 side (see FIG. 34(B)). After clearing the stored game information, the second control means for inputting the erasing information because the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(A)) on the CU3 side is cleared). By first performing the erasure in , the processing related to these erasures can be simplified.

Further, the second control means includes erasure request transmission means capable of transmitting an erasure request for game-related information to the first control means (for example, as shown in FIG. a portion for transmitting a status response command including data indicating (yes) to the CU 3), and the erasure request transmitting means transmits an erasure completion notification to the effect that erasure has been completed in response to the erasure request output. If it is not received from the first control means, the erasure request is transmitted again (for example, as shown in FIG. If the state request command is not received, the state response command including the data of the repeating table data clear instruction (yes) is sent to the CU3), so the information related to the game stored in the first control means is erased. , can be done more reliably.

Further, the first control means transmits a state request (for example, a state request command shown in FIG. 33) requesting transmission of information regarding the state of the second control means to the second control means, Since the erasure request transmitting means transmits the erasure request as a status response (for example, status response command shown in FIG. 33) that is a response to the status request, the erasure request is transmitted as a status response that is a response to the status request. By doing so, it is possible to ensure that the erasure request is received by the first control means.

Also, the erasing information is output from a management device that manages the gaming devices (for example, as shown in FIG. Since the game information stored in the game information storage table (see FIG. 34(B)) is cleared based on the reception of the game information, the erasure of the game information can be instructed in the management device.

[2. Second embodiment]
FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing a control circuit used for CU3 and P-table 2 in the second embodiment. The same components as those in FIG. 5 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and repeated descriptions are omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first LAN communication unit 328 provided in the CU3 is connected to the LAN communication destination 1 such as the information distribution server 901, performs LAN communication with this LAN communication destination 1, performs various information can be transmitted and received.

A second LAN communication unit 329 included in CU3 is connected to the LAN communication destination 2, performs LAN communication with this LAN communication destination 2, and is configured to be capable of transmitting and receiving various types of information. LAN communication destination 2 includes a hall server 801 . However, in the following embodiments, the LAN communication destination 2 does not include the management computer 900, and the CU3 communicates with the management computer 900 via the serial communication unit 334 in a non-LAN manner. That is, the connection format between CU3 and management computer 900 is different from the configuration of the gaming system shown in FIG.

CU3 includes a serial communication unit 334 in place of the call lamp communication unit 327 of FIG. The serial communication unit 334 is a communication device for serial communication with external devices installed in the store. In this embodiment, the external devices include the call lamp 1000, the relay device 1200, and the management computer 900, and the serial communication unit 334 can communicate with the call lamp 1000 via the distributor 950 installed in the store. and can communicate with the management computer 900 via the relay device 1200 .

Relay device 1200 is an external device having a function of relaying data transmission and reception between CU 3 and management computer 900 . The relay device 1200 may be a machine computer (machine controller) provided for each game machine, or may be an island computer (island controller) provided for each game island.

In this embodiment, the CU3 is the master station and the external devices (the management computer 900 and the call lamp 1000) are the slave stations. It is configured to be able to communicate with the device. RS-485, for example, can be applied as this serial communication standard. RS-485 uses a dedicated pair of lines for sending and receiving data, and uses the voltage difference between the two lines to transmit data.

In this embodiment, the serial communication unit 334 has a modular connector for RS-485. , and the wiring between the distributor 950 and the relay device 1200 form a transmission line from CU3 to the call lamp 1000 and the relay device 1200 via the distributor 950 . Also, the relay device 1200 and the management computer 900 are connected by a LAN or the like, and the CU3 is configured to be able to communicate with the management computer 900 via the relay device 1200 .

RS-485 uses a pair of transmission lines as a differential pair. Distributor 950 and call lamp 1000 are connected, for example, by half-duplex RS-485 (two-wire) wiring, and data transmission from CU3 to call lamp 1000 via distributor 950 and Data transmission to relay device 1200 via distributor 950 is possible. In order to prevent reflection, the calling lamp 1000 is preferably provided with a terminating resistor, but this is omitted from the drawing.

The reason for constructing such a transmission system by RS-485 is that communication between CU3 and external devices can be performed without modifying CU3 which is designed for communication based on serial communication standards such as RS-485. This is to make it possible. This is also because some call lamps 1000 and relay devices 1200 may not be compatible with the LAN system.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the communication between CU3 and the external device is performed by a non-LAN system. CU3 is the master station, and the external device is the slave station. data transmission only). By doing so, it becomes possible to output information from the CU 3 to external devices (the management computer 900 and the call lamp 1000) using an existing communication system without supporting the LAN system.

It is also possible to configure the system so that CU 3 and management computer 900 are directly connected for communication without going through relay device 1200 . In this case, the CU3 and the management computer 900 may be connected for communication using a non-LAN system.

Data corresponding to the state information response described in the first embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machine data") is output from the P machine 2 at a cycle of 200 ms, and the CU 3 outputs P The game machine data is received from the machine 2 at a period of 200 ms. Then, the CU 3 executes a tallying process based on the game information contained in the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2, and performs information (first information) corresponding to the received gaming information and information corresponding to the tally result of the tallying process. (Second information) is transmitted to the external device.

As described in the first embodiment, the outer end output section 331 includes an external output circuit 332 for controlling the output of a signal from the CU3 to the outside, and an external output port connected to the external output circuit 332. are provided, and corresponding terminals are connected to the respective external output ports. Although four external output ports and four terminals are illustrated in the drawings, the numbers of these external output ports and terminals can be changed as appropriate. At present, it is assumed that the maximum number is about 20, but it is being considered to increase the number to about 40 in the future.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of external transmission data, which is data output from the serial communication unit 334 to an external device.
The external transmission data is frame data configured as one telegram, and is composed of a header portion, a telegram length portion, a data portion, a footer portion, and an error detection portion.

The header part is the prefix of the external transmission data. Information such as STX, for example, is stored in the header portion. STX is a control character representing the text start of telegram in serial communication.

The message length section is a storage section that stores the message length of the external transmission data. The message length field stores, for example, the message length from STX to ETX.

The data section is a storage section that stores main data to be notified to the external device in the external transmission data. In this embodiment, the data section stores normal information and recovery information (normal information+recovery information), which will be described later.

The footer part is the suffix part of the external transmission data. Information such as ETX, for example, is stored in the footer. ETX is a control character representing the end of the text of a telegram in serial communication.

The error detection unit is a storage unit that stores information for error detection (error detection information) of the externally transmitted data. Error detection methods include parity check (horizontal/vertical parity check), Hamming code check, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), and the like. The error detection unit stores a value obtained by XORing the values from STX to ETX, for example, as a code for error detection.

Any of the above methods can be applied as an error detection method, and external transmission data including information for error detection corresponding to each method can be configured.

44 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the data portion included in the external transmission data of FIG. 43. FIG.
The data part includes "No" indicating the data number, "data name" which is the name of the data, and "contents" of the data. Specific data are represented by Bits shown in the "Contents" column.

The data of No "1" has a data name of "serial number" and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. "Machine number" indicates the number of the gaming machine (installation machine number) on which the CU3 is installed. It should be noted that the holder ID in the third embodiment described later may also be used.

The data of Nos. 2 to 7 have the data name of 'game state'. This game state indicates the current game state of the P table 2 .

The data of No "2" has a data name of "gaming machine state 2 (jackpot, etc.)", and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. Specifically, when the P table 2 is controlled to "jackpot 1 (all jackpots)", Bit0 is set to "1", and the P table 2 is controlled to "jackpot 2 (specific jackpot)". Bit1 is set to "1" when there is, and Bit2 is set to "1" when P machine 2 is controlled to "jackpot 3 (time-saving jackpot)". Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

The data of No "3" has a data name of "gaming machine state 2 (high probability, etc.)", and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. Specifically, when the P table 2 is controlled to "jackpot + time saving", Bit0 is set to "1", and when the P table 2 is controlled to "high probability state" (variable probability state) , Bit1 is set to "1", and when P 2 is controlled to "time saving state", Bit2 is set to "1", and when P 2 is in the state of "fluctuation" Bit3 is set to "1". Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

The data of No "4" has a data name of "fraud detection state 1 (game board)", and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. Specifically, Bit0 is set to "1" when "improper board surface 1" is detected on P machine 2, and Bit1 is set to "1" when "improper board surface 2" is detected on P machine 2. ”, Bit2 is set to “1” when “improper board surface 3” is detected on P machine 2, and Bit3 is set to “1” when “improper board surface 4” is detected on P machine 2 ”, Bit 4 is set to “1” when “improper board surface 5” is detected on the P machine 2, and Bit 5 is set to “1” when “improper board surface 6” is detected on the P machine 2 ”. Bit6 to Bit7 are reserved.

The data of No "5" has a data name of "fraud detection state 2 (gaming machine frame)", and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. Specifically, Bit 0 is set to "1" when "open front decoration" is detected on P base 2, and Bit 1 is set to "1" when "back mechanism part open" is detected on P base 2. Bit 2 is set to "1" when "unauthorized radio wave" is detected at P-unit 2, and Bit 3 is set to "1" when "proximity sensor abnormality" is detected at P-unit 2. ”, and Bit4 is set to “1” when “abnormal number of winning balls 1” is detected in P machine 2, and when “abnormal number of winning balls 2” is detected in P machine 2 Bit5 is set to "1", and when "unauthorized ball lending" is detected in P unit 2, Bit6 is set to "1", and when "abnormal night monitoring device" is detected in P unit 2 Bit7 is set to "1".

The data of No "6" has a data name of "fraud detection state 3 (gaming machine frame)", and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. Specifically, Bit0 is set to "1" when "remaining ball data" is detected on P table 2, and Bit1 is set to "1" when "iron ball" is detected on P table 2. Bit 2 is set to "1" when "small ball" is detected on P table 2, and Bit 3 is set to "1" when "ball unit price mismatch" is detected on P table 2 set. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

The data of No "7" has a data name of "gaming machine error state", and is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. An error code occurring in the P machine 2 is stored in this gaming machine error state.

The data of Nos. 8 to 21 have a data name of 'recovery information'. This recovery information is information used to cause the external device to perform recovery. In this embodiment, causing the external device to perform recovery means that the game information stored and managed by the external device is reflected in the game information of the P machine 2 using the recovery information provided from the CU 3. It means correcting to the correct game information.

The data of No. 8 is the "cumulative number of out-passed balls", the data of No. 9 is the cumulative total number of prize balls, and the data of No. 10 is the cumulative number of symbol determinations. , the data with No. 11 is the "starting opening cumulative value", the data with No. 12 is the "gate passing cumulative value", and the data with No. 13 is the "accessory cumulative value". The data of No. 14 is the 'cumulative number of winning prizes', the data of No. 15 is the 'cumulative value of passing through a specific area', and the data of No. 16 is the 'cumulative value of 1 jackpot'. The data of No "17" is "big hit 2 cumulative value", the data of No "18" is "big hit 3 cumulative value", and the data of No "19" is "(big hit + time saving) cumulative value , the data of No "20" is the "high probability cumulative value", and the data of No "21" is the "time reduction cumulative value".

The contents of the recovery information for Nos. "8" to "21" store values representing the cumulative value of each data in Bits. The data amount of these data is about "2 bytes" to "3 bytes" respectively.

The data of No "22" has the data name "unit state", and the data indicating the state of the CU3 is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte", for example. Specifically, Bit0 is set to "1" when CU3 is in the "unit error" state, and Bit1 is set to "1" when CU3 is in the "calling" state. Bit2 is set to "1" when CU3 is in the state of "calling (service)", Bit3 is set to "1" when CU3 is in the state of "resting", and CU3 is in the state of " Bit 4 is set to "1" when CU3 is in the state of "Exceeding fixed amount setting", Bit 5 is set to "1", and CU3 is in the state of " If it is in the state of "checking for an empty table", Bit6 is set to "1". Bit7 is reserved.

The data of No "23" has a data name of "number of data", and the number of data stored in the numbers after No "24" is represented by, for example, data having a data amount of "1 byte". Specifically, the total number of pieces of game information and unit information is stored in the number of pieces of data. In this embodiment, the number of game information is "p", the number of unit information is "q", and the number of data is "p+q".

The data of No. 24 and No. 25 have data names of 'game information 1' to 'game information p' & 'unit information 1' to 'unit information q', and No. '24' contains game information and "Type" of unit information is stored, and "count information" of the corresponding type is stored in No "25".

The type of No. "24" includes P-unit data and CU data, and for example, one type of data is represented by data having a data amount of "1 byte."

The P-table data is a hexadecimal number, for example, "0x00" for no data, "0x01" for winning a prize at the starting gate, "0x02" for winning a prize at a big winning gate, "0x03" for the number of times of design determination, and "0x03" for a big hit. 0x05", "0x06" for a small hit, "0x07" for passing through a gate, "0x08" for the number of characters, "0x09" for passing through a specific area, and "0x0A" to "0x7F" are preliminary.

The CU data is hexadecimal, for example, "0x80" for sale, "0x81" for consumption, "0x82" for replay, "0x83" for count, "0x84" for ball payout, "0x84" for share and division. 0x85”, and “0x86” to “0xFF” are reserved.

The count information of No. 25 includes the count information of the P unit 2 and the count information of the CU 3, and for each of them, the count value of the data of the corresponding type is, for example, "3 bytes" of data per type. Expressed as quantitative data.

As described in the first embodiment, the gaming machine data (status information response) transmitted from the P machine 2 includes "n" pieces of information of "game information 1" to "game information n". The n pieces of game information include, for example, ball number information such as the number of out-passed balls (out) and the number of prize balls (safe) on the P machine 2, and the number of big hits that occurred on the P machine 2, such as the number of big wins and the number of big wins. information, passing information such as the number of times the game ball has passed through the gate on the P table 2 and the number of times it has passed through a specific area, launch information such as the number of shots of the game ball at the P table 2 and the shooting intensity, errors such as error 1 and error 2 that occurred on the P table 2 information, etc., and the total number of these pieces of information is n.

In this embodiment, the CU 3 thins out the n game information itself (p=n) contained in the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2, or a part of the n game information. The game information (p<n) is included in the external transmission data and transmitted to the external device. The game information itself or part of the game information in the external device corresponds to the first information corresponding to the received game information.

In addition, the CU 3 is a cumulative value (hereinafter referred to as (hereinafter referred to as "game information cumulative value") is executed, and recovery information including the game information cumulative value calculated by the tallying process is included in the external transmission data and transmitted to the external device. This recovery information corresponds to the second information corresponding to the result of counting by the counting process.

Here, as the target range (target period) for accumulating the count value of various game information in the above-mentioned tallying process, for example, from the start of business to the end of business of the store can be set. In other words, CU3 can calculate the game information cumulative value from the start of business to the end of business in the totalization process.

In the following description, of the information stored in the data section, information excluding the recovery information is collectively referred to as "normal information".

45 and 46 are timing charts for explaining the timing at which CU3 receives gaming machine data transmitted from P machine 2 and the timing at which CU3 transmits external transmission data to an external device. indicates the timing at which the gaming machine data is received from the P machine 2, and the lower part indicates the timing at which the CU3 transmits the external transmission data to the external device.

In these figures, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the game machine data and the external transmission data are indicated by rectangles. The width of the rectangle indicating the gaming machine data indicates the time (receiving time) required for the CU3 to receive the gaming machine data, and the width of the rectangle indicating the external transmission data indicates the time required for the CU3 to transmit the external transmission data. It shows the time (transmission time).

As shown in FIG. 45, CU3 receives gaming machine data transmitted from P machine 2 at a receiving cycle of 200 ms. Here, the reception cycle is the timing at which reception of one gaming machine data is started (timing at which one gaming machine data rises in the diagram) to the timing at which reception of the next gaming machine data is started (next timing in the diagram). It is the time up to the start-up timing of the gaming machine data).

Each time the CU 3 receives the game machine data from the P machine 2, it executes a tallying process. The CU3 internally accumulates the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2 by storing it in the CU storage unit 3231 shown in FIG. In the tallying process, the count value is individually accumulated and added for each of the various types of game information contained in the game information stored in the received gaming machine data to calculate the game information accumulated value, and the normal information and the game information accumulated value are calculated. It is a process of generating external transmission data including recovery information composed of values.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of data stored in the CU storage unit 3231, which is a storage unit built into the CU control unit 323 of the CU3, in this embodiment. The CU storage unit 3231 is a storage device including memories such as ROM, EEPROM, and RAM.

As described in the first embodiment, the maximum number n of game information transmitted from the P machines 2 is about 22 (n=22), and information such as the gaming machine status of the P machines 2 is included. Therefore, the amount of data received by the CU3 from the P unit 2 is large. In other words, CU3 receives gaming machine data with a large amount of data in a short period of 200 ms.

In this embodiment, the time required for totalization processing (processing time for totalization processing) will be described as "αms (milliseconds)". In this case, the timing at which CU3 starts transmitting the external transmission data is delayed by "αms" from the timing at which the gaming machine data is received. Although it depends on the performance of the processing device (processor or the like) included in the CU control unit 323, the processing time is assumed to be approximately 30 ms (α=30).

Considering the data transmission delay for the processing time “αms” of the above aggregation process, the timing at which the transmission of the external transmission data by CU3 is completed is “βms” after the timing at which the reception of the next gaming machine data is started. Become slow. However, "β" is the total processing time "αms" plus the transmission time of external transmission data (the time from the start to the end of transmission of external transmission data) "ωms". Calculated as the time (β = α + ω - γ) subtracted by the data reception time interval (time from completion of reception of one game machine data to start of reception of the next game machine data) “γms” .

When the tallying process ends, CU3 starts sending the generated external transmission data. Therefore, when CU3 transmits the externally transmitted data, a delay corresponding to the processing time of the tallying process occurs. Therefore, at the timing of starting reception of the next game machine data, the CU3 may be in a state where the transmission of the external transmission data generated based on the previous game machine data has not yet been completed.

In order to solve this problem, there are two possible methods: (1) increasing the transfer speed of externally transmitted data; and (2) reducing the total amount of externally transmitted data. By increasing the transfer speed of the externally transmitted data, even if the total amount of externally transmitted data is the same, the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time is increased. Further, by reducing the data amount of the externally transmitted data, the transfer time per unit data amount is shortened even if the transfer speed of the externally transmitted data is the same. FIG. 46 shows this situation. In FIG. 46, the width of the external transmission data is shorter than in FIG. 45, and the timing at which transmission of the external transmission data is completed is earlier than in FIG.

When reducing the total data amount of the externally transmitted data, it is conceivable to thin out part of the game information stored in the data portion of the externally transmitted data. Thinning out means excluding part of the information from the transmission targets. That is, as described above, among the n pieces of game information included in the gaming machine data transmitted from the P machine 2, the game information of low importance to the external device is excluded from the targets of transmission to the external device, and the remaining The external transmission data including the game information in the data portion may be transmitted to the external device.

Ideally, the transmission of the external transmission data should be completed at the same time or before the next gaming machine data is received from the P machine 2 . That is, in FIG. 46, the transmission of the external transmission data is performed so that the transmission of the external transmission data is completed at a timing earlier by "β1 ms" (where β1≧β) than the timing at which the transmission of the external transmission data shown in FIG. 45 is completed. It is desirable to adjust the transfer rate and data volume. By doing so, it is possible to absorb the time required for the tallying process, that is, the delay corresponding to the processing time of the tallying process, and to smoothly shift to the tallying process based on the next received gaming machine data. .

However, it is not always necessary to complete the transmission of the externally transmitted data at the same time or before the next game machine data is received from the P machine 2. In terms of reducing the delay in , there is no problem if the timing at which the transmission of the external transmission data is completed is earlier than in the case shown in FIG. That is, in FIG. 46, the transmission of the external transmission data is performed so that the transmission of the external transmission data is completed at a timing earlier by "β2 ms" (where β2<β) than the timing at which the transmission of the external transmission data shown in FIG. 45 is completed. You may adjust a transfer rate and a total amount of data.

The total amount of externally transmitted data mainly depends on the number of game information data stored in the data section. It is expected to be to some extent. In this case, if the transfer speed is roughly calculated to be "19200 bps (2.4 bytes/ms)" or higher, the external transmission data can be transmitted to the external device so that the data transmission delay for the total processing time can be adjusted. can.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of CU processing, which is processing executed by the CU control unit 323, and management computer processing, which is processing executed by the processing unit of the management computer 900, in this embodiment. CU processing is shown on the left, and management computer processing is shown on the right.

First, the CU control unit 323 requests gaming machine data from the P machine 2 (A1), and receives gaming machine data transmitted from the P machine 2 in response to this request. Next, the CU control unit 323 executes tally processing based on the received gaming machine data (A3).

In the counting process, the CU control unit 323 executes a game information cumulative value calculation process (A3-1). In this game information cumulative value calculation process, the game information cumulative value is calculated by accumulating the count value of the game information included in the game machine data. That is, for each piece of game information, by adding the count value of the game information specified from the gaming machine data received this time to the game information cumulative value calculated in the previous game information cumulative value calculation process, the game information cumulative value is calculated. Calculate the value.

Next, the CU control unit 323 executes external transmission data generation processing (A3-2). Specifically, it generates external transmission data including normal information and recovery information including each game information cumulative value calculated in A3-1. Then, the CU control unit 323 ends the counting process.

After that, the CU control unit 323 transmits external transmission data (A5). Specifically, control is executed to transmit the external transmission data generated in A3-2 to the serial communication unit 334. FIG. The external transmission data is transmitted to the call lamp 1000 and the relay device 1200 via the distributor 950 . Then, relay device 1200 transfers the external transmission data received from CU3 to management computer 900 .

Next, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not to end the process (A7), and if it determines to continue the process (A7; No), returns the process to A1. If the CU control unit 323 determines to end the processing (A7; Yes), the CU control unit 323 ends the CU processing.

The processing unit of management computer 900 determines whether external transmission data has been newly received from CU3 via relay device 1200 (B1), and if it determines that data has been received (B1; Yes), data abnormality determination Execute the process (B3).

Specifically, an error detection process is executed using the error detection information stored in the error detection unit for the received external transmission data to detect errors in the received external transmission data. Errors are detected when correct data cannot be received due to factors such as electrical noise or coding errors.

Further, in the data abnormality determination process, it is determined whether or not the received external transmission data has a data loss. Loss of data is detected when, for example, a part of the data has been lost (missed) due to factors such as a power failure of the device, insufficient processing speed, or insufficient memory.

If the data abnormality determination process does not determine that the data is abnormal (B5; No), the processing unit of the management computer 900 determines whether or not to end the process (B7). (B7; No), the process returns to B1. If it is determined that the processing should be terminated (B7; Yes), the processing section of the management computer 900 terminates the management computer processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in B1 that externally transmitted data has not been newly received (B1; Yes), the processing section of the management computer 900 determines whether externally transmitted data cannot be received (B9). The unreceivable mentioned here means that external transmission data transmitted from the CU3 at a cycle of 200 ms cannot be received due to a communication failure or the like. For example, the time from the start of receiving the previous externally transmitted data to the start of receiving new externally transmitted data is the externally transmitted data transmission cycle of 200 ms plus a certain grace time (for example, 100 ms). When the time is reached, it can be determined that reception is not possible.

If it is determined that reception is not possible (B9; No), the processing section of the management computer 900 returns the process to B1. On the other hand, if it is determined that reception is impossible (B9 Yes), the processing section of the management computer 900 executes reception error processing (B11).

Specifically, for example, a message to the effect that reception is impossible is displayed on the display unit of the management computer 900, or a warning sound is output from the sound output unit of the management computer 900, thereby causing problems such as communication failure. Inform the manager of the store that there is a possibility that The processing unit of the management computer 900 suspends execution of the management computer processing until the problem is resolved, and after the problem is resolved, resumes execution of the management computer processing according to the operation of the administrator.

If a data abnormality is detected in B5 (B5; Yes), the processing section of the management computer 900 executes data error processing (B13). Specifically, for example, a message to the effect that a data error has been detected is displayed on the display unit of the management computer 900, or a warning sound is output from the sound output unit of the management computer 900, thereby causing the device or the transmission line to respond in some way. Notify the store manager that a problem may be occurring. The processing unit of the management computer 900 suspends execution of the management computer processing until the problem is resolved, and after the problem is resolved, resumes execution of the management computer processing according to the operation of the administrator.

In the above data error processing, an error correction processing based on a conventionally known error correction method may be executed to correct errors contained in the received external transmission data. If the error correction is successful, the external transmission data after correction is stored in the storage unit, and the process is shifted to B7.

In the second embodiment, the CU3 receives game information from the P machine 2, and the CU control unit 323 executes counting processing based on the received game information. Then, according to the control of the CU control unit 323, the serial communication unit 334 receives the received game information as it is or a part of the received game information, and the information for recovery corresponding to the totalization result of the totalization process. The transmission data is transmitted to external devices such as the management computer 900 and the call lamp 1000 .

According to this, when an external device such as the management computer 900 or the call lamp 1000 cannot receive the externally transmitted data from the CU 3 for a certain period of time and then receives the externally transmitted data, the P units 2 including the period during which the data could not be received The external device can acquire the cumulative value related to the state change etc. as recovery information, and the external device can correct the game information of the P machine 2 during the period that was not received using this recovery information to the correct game information. , the management computer 900, the call lamp 1000, and other external devices can appropriately manage information.

[3. Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment, which is an application of the above second embodiment, will be described.
The block diagram showing the control circuit used for CU3 and P-table 2 in the third embodiment is almost the same as the block diagram shown in FIG. The difference is that the transmission path leading to the lamp 1000 and the relay device 1200 is configured to enable two-way communication instead of one-way communication.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the distributor 950 and the call lamp 1000 are connected by, for example, full-duplex RS-485 system (4-wire system) wiring. and an external device to perform two-way communication.

In this embodiment, the CU storage unit 3231 stores, for example, as a program shown in FIG. A program 3233 is stored. The CU storage unit 3231 also stores a game information management table 3234, an external transmission data management table 3235, unit setting data 3236, and a machine number 3237 as data. The CU storage unit 3231 also includes a game machine database 3238 and a game information accumulation database 3239 as databases (DB).

The game information management table 3234 is a table for managing game information included in the game machine data transmitted from the P machine 2 in the CU3, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The game information management table 3234 includes an information classification in which game information is grouped by type, an information No. that is the information classification and the number of the game information included in the information classification, an information name that is the name of the game information, are determined in association with the rank of the game information of the information name. In the information name column, n pieces of game information included in the game machine data transmitted from the P machine 2 are classified and defined for each information classification.

The rank indicates the degree of importance (also referred to as priority) of game information, with "A" having the highest degree of importance, and "B", "C", "D", . . . It shows that

The information classification includes classification such as "number of balls information", "jackpot information", "passing information", "launch information", and "error information".

The number of the information classification “ball number information” is “1”, and this ball number information includes game information such as the number of out-passed balls, the total number of prize balls, etc., and is respectively “1a” and “ 1b”, .

The number of the information classification "jackpot information" is "2", and this jackpot information includes game information such as one jackpot, two jackpots, . . . , etc., and in this example, a rank “B” is assigned to each.

The number of the information classification "passage information" is "3", and this passage information includes game information such as the number of gate passages, the number of passages of a specific area, . . . . . , etc., and in this example, rank “C” is assigned to each.

The number of the information category "shooting information" is "4", and this shooting information includes game information such as the number of shots, the intensity of shots, and so on, which are respectively "4a", "4b", and so on. , etc., and in this example a rank of "D" is assigned to each.

The number of the information classification "error information" is "5", and this error information includes game information such as error 1, error 2, . , etc., and in this example each is assigned a rank of "A".

In the game information management table 3234 described above, the rank is determined for each piece of game information in the information name column, but these ranks may be different. In other words, different ranks may be defined for game information within the same information classification. Also, in the game information management table 3234, the rank may be determined for each information classification defined in the information classification column. That is, instead of determining the rank for individual game information, the rank may be determined for comprehensive game information.

The external transmission data management table 3235 is a table used for managing the type of external transmission data to be transmitted from the device itself to the external device, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the external transmission data management table 3235, the data type No, which is the number of the type of the external transmission data, and the type of the external transmission data (the type of the data portion is shown in parentheses) are defined in association with each other.

The data type No. 1 is defined as the first type external transmission data, and the data part X is defined as the type of the data part.
The second type external transmission data is defined for the data type No. "2", and the data part Y is defined as the data part type.
The third type external transmission data is defined for the data type No. "3", and the data part Z is defined as the type of the data part.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the various types of external transmission data described above.
As shown in FIG. 51(1), the type 1 external transmission data is frame data as a single message consisting of a header portion, a message length portion, a data portion X, a footer portion, and an error detection portion. configured as The data section X is composed of normal information and recovery information (normal information+recovery information). This type 1 external transmission data is the same data as the external transmission data (see FIG. 43) described in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51(2), the type 2 external transmission data is frame data as one telegram consisting of a header portion, a telegram length portion, a data portion Y, a footer portion, and an error detection portion. configured as Also, the data section Y is composed only of normal information. This type 2 external transmission data is data having a configuration in which the recovery information is excluded from the data portion of the type 1 external transmission data.

As shown in FIG. 51(3), the type 3 external transmission data consists of a header part, a message length part, a data part Z, a footer part, and an error detection part. Configured as frame data. The data section Z is composed only of recovery information. This type 3 external transmission data is data having a structure in which the normal information is excluded from the data portion of the type 1 external transmission data.

The three types of external transmission data described above differ in the total data amount because the type and number of information stored in the data section are different. Since the message length changes according to the data volume of the data part, the external device determines the data type of the received external transmission data based on the message length stored in the message length part of the received external transmission data. be able to. In order to facilitate determination of the data type, for example, a code (data type code) representing the data type of the external transmission data may be stored in the header portion.

The unit setting data 3236 is data for making settings related to totaling of game information in its own device, transmission of external transmission data, and the like, and an example of the data structure is shown in FIG.
The unit setting data 3236 is data generated in units of a certain group of CUs 3 installed in the store. Object information No., setting normal transmission data type No., and setting abnormal transmission data type No. are stored.

A group of CU3 to which the unit setting data 3236 is applied is set in the unit group. This unit group includes, for example, a group unit of CU3 provided corresponding to the P units 2 of the same model, a group unit of CU3 installed on the same game island, and a group unit of several adjacent CU3 units. Groups can be applied.

Note that individual unit setting data 3236 may be generated for each CU3. In this case, the unit group may be the unit ID, which is the unique identification number (ID) of CU3.

The set non-transmission target information rank is the setting of the rank of the game information to be excluded from the data portion of the external transmission data, that is, the rank of the game information not to be transmitted to the external device. The rank selected from among is stored.

The setting non-aggregation target information No. is a setting of the number of the game information to be excluded from the calculation target of the game information cumulative value in the aggregation process among the game information included in the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2. The number selected from the numbers defined in the information management table 3234 is stored.

The set normal transmission data type No. is a setting for the type of external transmission data that is normally transmitted from the CU 3 to the external device. is stored.

The setting error transmission data type No. is a setting for the type of external transmission data to be transmitted from the CU 3 to the external device when an abnormality occurs. is stored.

For example, the unit setting data 3236 shown at the top of FIG. 52 is data applied to CU3 included in the unit group "group 1". Since the set non-transmission target information rank is “rank D or lower”, among the game information defined in the game information management table 3234 of FIG. It means not to transmit to external equipment. Further, since the setting non-aggregation target information No. is "4, 5", the shooting information and the error information among the game information defined in the game information management table 3234 of FIG. It means to exclude from the object of value calculation.

In addition, since the set normal transmission data type No. is "2", the second type external transmission data in which only the normal information is stored among the external transmission data shown in FIG. )) is transmitted from the CU3 to the external device, and the data type No. for transmission at setting abnormality is "1". This means that the stored type 1 external transmission data ((1) in FIG. 51) is transmitted from CU3 to the external device.

The machine number 3237 is the game machine number set in association with the installation position of the own unit. At a position adjacent to the installation position of the P table 2, there is a holder (mounting frame, mounting fixture) to which the main body (housing) of the CU3 can be mounted, and is a unit holder that holds the main body of the CU3 so that it can be pulled out in the front direction. is installed. A unit holder is provided for each game machine, and even if the CU3 is replaced with a new one or relocated, the unit holder itself is not replaced and the previous one is used continuously.

The unit holder is provided with a holder substrate on its back surface, and the memory (ROM, non-volatile memory, etc.) of the holder substrate stores the unit number or ID of the unit holder (hereinafter referred to as "holder ID"). Registered. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the base number is registered in the memory of the holder substrate. For the structure of the unit holder, the structure disclosed in, for example, FIG. 7 of JP-A-2012-100979 can be applied.

By attaching the CU3 to the unit holder and connecting it to the holder substrate, the CU3 can obtain the unit number from the holder substrate. The CU control unit 323 causes the CU storage unit 3231 to store the serial number 3237 acquired from the holder substrate.

It is also possible that the holder ID is registered in the holder substrate, and the CU 3 obtains and stores the holder ID from the holder substrate. In this case, management of the holder ID may be performed by a hall computer installed in the store or a management device such as the management computer 900 by associating the P table 2 with the CU 3 . The machine number and the holder ID correspond to gaming machine identification information that can identify the gaming machine.

The game machine database 3238 is a database in which the game machine data received from the P machines 2 are stored in an accumulative manner. Since the game machine data includes game information, the game information received from the P machine 2 is also stored in the game machine database 3238 in an accumulative manner.

The game information cumulative database 3239 is game information including the game information cumulative value of each type of game information calculated by the CU control unit 323 executing aggregation processing based on the game machine data stored in the game machine database 3238. It is a database that stores cumulative data and game image method cumulative data acquired from an external device.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of CU processing, which is processing executed by the CU control unit 323, and management computer processing, which is processing executed by the management computer 900, in this embodiment. CU processing is shown on the left, and management computer processing is shown on the right. The same steps as those of the CU process and the management computer process shown in FIG. 47 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and repeated explanations are omitted.

After A1, the CU control unit 323 accumulatively stores the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2 in the gaming machine database 3238 of the storage unit 3231 (C3). Next, the CU control unit 323 executes normal external transmission data generation processing (C4). Specifically, based on the gaming machine data received this time (latest gaming machine data), normal external transmission of the type corresponding to the set normal transmission data type No stored in the unit setting data 3236 Generate data.

Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits normal external transmission data (C5). Specifically, control is executed to transmit the normal external transmission data generated in C4 to the serial communication unit 334 . Normal external transmission data is transmitted to call lamp 1000 and relay device 1200 via distributor 950 . Then, relay device 1200 transfers the normal external transmission data received from CU3 to management computer 900 via LAN communication.

The processing unit of the management computer 900 determines whether normal external transmission data has been newly received from the CU3 via the relay device 1200 (D1). An abnormality determination process is executed (B3), and if it is determined that the data is not abnormal (B5; No), a normal data reception notification is sent to CU3 via relay device 1200 (D7). The normal time data reception notification is a response to the normal time external transmission data transmission (notification) command from the CU3 and notifies the CU3 that reception of the normal time external transmission data has been normally completed. The normal data reception notification is also transmitted to call lamp 1000 via relay device 1200 . Then, the processing unit of the management computer 900 shifts the processing to B7.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data is abnormal (B5; Yes), the processing section of the management computer 900 notifies CU3 of the normal data abnormality via the relay device 1200 (D9). This normal time data abnormality notification is a response to the normal time external transmission data transmission (notification) command from CU3 and notifies CU3 that the received normal time external transmission data has an abnormality. The normal data abnormality notification is also sent to the calling lamp 1000 via the relay device 1200 .

After C5, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not a normal data reception notification has been received from the management computer 900 via the relay device 1200 (C7). Move to .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal data reception notification has not been received (C7; No), the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the normal data abnormality notification has been received from the management computer 900 (C9). Then, if it is determined that it has been received, the CU control unit 323 executes totalization processing (C11). Specifically, based on the game machine data accumulated in the game machine database 3238 of the CU storage unit 3231, the game information cumulative value calculation process is executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment.

In the game information cumulative value calculation process, among the game information included in the game machine data accumulated in the game machine database 3238, the game information corresponding to the setting non-aggregate target information No. stored in the unit setting data 3236 A game information cumulative value is calculated by accumulating the count value for the game information excluding the game information. Subsequently, the CU control unit 323 executes external transmission data generation processing. Specifically, based on the calculation result of the game information cumulative value calculation process, the abnormal external transmission data of the type corresponding to the setting abnormality transmission data type number stored in the unit setting data 3236 is generated. . Then, the CU control unit 323 ends the counting process.

Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits abnormal external transmission data (C13). Specifically, control for transmitting the abnormal external transmission data generated in C11 to the serial communication unit 334 is executed. The abnormal external transmission data is transmitted to the call lamp 1000 and the relay device 1200 via the distributor 950 . Then, the relay device 1200 transfers the abnormal external transmission data received from the CU3 to the management computer 900 by LAN communication.

After D9, the processing unit of the management computer 900 determines whether or not the abnormal external transmission data has been received from the CU3 via the relay device 1200 (D11), and if it is determined that it has been received (D11; Yes). , data abnormality determination processing is executed (D13). This data abnormality determination process is realized as a process using the same method as the data abnormality determination process of B3.

If it is determined that the data is not abnormal (D15; No), the CU control unit 323 notifies the CU3 of the abnormal data reception via the relay device 1200 (D17). The abnormal data reception notification is a response to the abnormal external transmission data transmission (notification) command from the CU3 and notifies the CU3 that reception of the abnormal external transmission data has been normally completed. The abnormal data reception notification is also transmitted to the call lamp 1000 via the relay device 1200 . Then, the processing unit of the management computer 900 shifts the processing to B7.

After C13, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not an abnormal data reception notification has been received from the management computer 900 via the relay device 1200 (C15). Move to .

If it is determined at C9 that the normal data abnormality notification has not been received from the management computer 900 (C9; No), or if it has been determined at C15 that the abnormal data reception notification has not been received (C15; No), the CU control unit 323 executes error processing (C17).

Also, if the processing unit of the management computer 900 determines in D1 that no new normal external transmission data has been received (D1; No), the process proceeds to B9. If it is determined in B9 that reception is impossible (B9; Yes), the processing section of the management computer 900 executes reception error processing (B11).

If it is determined at D11 that the abnormal external transmission data has not been received (D11; No), the process proceeds to B11, and if it is determined at D15 that the data is abnormal (D15; Yes), the process proceeds to B13. to move.

Here, when it is determined that the data is abnormal, the abnormal external transmission data is transmitted from the CU3 to the external device. The timing cannot be synchronized with the transmission timing of the externally transmitted data. Therefore, the CU control unit 323, for example, after receiving an abnormal data reception notification from the management computer 900, executes a process of synchronizing the data transmission/reception timing with the external device, and then returns the process to A1. should be

In the above process, it is conceivable that external transmission data cannot be received from CU3 due to a temporary communication failure or the like. Therefore, the processing unit of the management computer 900 may notify the CU that reception of normal external transmission data has failed when reception is determined to be impossible in B9. .

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of call lamp processing executed by the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 in this embodiment.
The processing unit of the call lamp 1000 determines whether or not normal external transmission data has been newly received from the CU 3 via the distributor 950 (E1). After storing the normal external transmission data in the storage unit, it is determined whether or not a normal data abnormality notification has been received from the management computer 900 via the distributor 950 (E3).

If it is determined that the normal data abnormality notification has not been received (E3; No), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 executes display update determination processing (E5). Specifically, for each of the game information set as the display target of the display unit, the count value included in the previous normal external transmission data stored in the storage unit and the normal external transmission data received this time It is determined whether or not the included count value matches.

In this embodiment, the game information set to be displayed on the display section of the call lamp 1000 can include information such as the number of starts, the number of big wins, the number of small wins, etc. on the P stand 2 to which the CU 3 is connected. If they match, it is determined that there is no need to update the display (the display update condition is not met), and if they do not match, it is determined that the display update is necessary (the display update condition is met).

If it is determined that the display update condition is satisfied (E7; Yes), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 executes display update processing (E9). Specifically, among the game information currently displayed on the display unit, for the game information determined to require display updating, the value currently displayed on the display unit is included in the normal external transmission data received this time. Control is performed to update and display the added value obtained by adding the count value of the game information.

Next, the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 determines whether or not to end the process (E11), and if it determines to continue the process (E11; No), returns the process to E1. If it is determined that the processing should be terminated (E11; Yes), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 terminates the call lamp processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that normal external transmission data has not been newly received from CU3 via distributor 950 (E1; No), the processing unit of call lamp 1000 cannot receive normal external transmission data. (E13), and if it is determined that reception is not disabled (E13; No), the process returns to E1. If it is determined that reception is impossible (E13; Yes), the processing unit of the calling lamp 1000 executes reception error processing (E15).

Also, when a normal data abnormality notification is received from the management computer 900 via the distributor 950 (E3; Yes), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 receives abnormal external transmission data from the CU3 via the distributor 950. is received (E17). If it is determined that the data has been received (E17), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 stores the received abnormal external transmission data in the storage unit, and then executes recovery determination processing (E19).

Specifically, for each of the game information set to be displayed on the display unit, the value of the game information currently being displayed and the game information included in the recovery information of the received abnormal external transmission data are displayed. It is determined whether or not the game information cumulative value matches. If they match, it is determined that recovery is not required (recovery condition is not met), and if they are not matched, it is determined that recovery is required (recovery condition is met).

If it is determined that the recovery condition is satisfied (E21; Yes), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 executes recovery processing (E23). Specifically, among the game information stored in the storage unit, the value of the game information determined to require recovery is stored and updated with the game information cumulative value included in the received recovery information. Then, the value of the game information being displayed is controlled to be displayed and updated with the game information cumulative value that has been stored and updated. Then, the processing unit of the calling lamp 1000 shifts the processing to E11.

If it is determined at E17 that the abnormal external transmission data has not been received (E17; No), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 executes reception error processing (E25).

In this call lamp processing, the processing unit of the call lamp 1000, like the management computer 900, executes data abnormality judgment processing for judging whether or not the normal external transmission data received from the CU 3 is abnormal. In this case, the normal data abnormality notification may be sent to the CU3.

In this case, in response to the normal data abnormality notification from the call lamp 1000, the CU3 may transmit the abnormal external transmission data to the external device. That is, the CU 3 may transmit abnormal external transmission data to an external device in response to a notification (request) from the management computer 900 , or may transmit abnormal external transmission data to an external device in response to a notification (request) from the call lamp 1000 . The transmission data may be transmitted to an external device.

In the third embodiment, the CU3 receives game information from the P machine 2. FIG. Under the control of the CU control unit 323, the serial communication unit 334 transmits external transmission data (second type external transmission data) including the received gaming information as it is or part of the received gaming information to the management computer 900 or the control computer 900. It is transmitted to an external device such as the calling lamp 1000 or the like. The CU control unit 323 executes counting processing based on the received gaming information. In response to the request, the serial communication unit 334, under the control of the CU control unit 323, transmits external transmission data (first type external transmission data, third type external data) to external devices such as the management computer 900 and the calling lamp 1000 .

According to this, normally, the received game information as it is or the external transmission data including a part of the received game information is transmitted to the external device. In response to a request from the calling lamp 1000, the data for transmission in abnormal state including the information for recovery can be transmitted to the external device. As a result, the external device can correct the game information of the P machine 2 to the correct game information by using the recovery information included in the data for transmission in the event of an abnormality, so that the external device can appropriately manage the information. Become.

[4. Fourth embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the system configuration in the fourth embodiment is the same as the system configuration in the second or third embodiment, the explanation will be omitted.

The CU3 is provided corresponding to the P table 2, but there is a case where the CU3 is moved to another P table 2. Specifically, if CU3 malfunctions and becomes inoperable, or if CU3 malfunctions such as inability to recognize deposits or cards, etc., if there is a problem with CU3, other gaming machines There is a case where the installed CU3 is moved to a game machine with a problem.

In addition, in stores that have introduced multiple types of CU3 with different performance, it is recommended to relocate CU3 in order to install high-performance CU3 on popular P machines, that is, P machine 2, which has a high operating rate. There are cases. In this case, when the CU3 is transferred, the correspondence relationship between the P machine 2 and the CU3 changes, so the game information managed by the CU3 before the transfer cannot be used as it is after the transfer. A present Example is an Example which solves this problem.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the relocation of CU3.
Here, the CU3 installed in the 1st series (unit number: 1) is relocated to the 11th series (unit number: 11), and the CU3 installed in the 11th series (unit number: 11) is transferred to the 1st series (unit number : 1), that is, the case of exchanging CU3 installed in two different numbers will be described as an example.

For example, the number of jackpots in the call lamp 1000 provided corresponding to CU3 installed in the first stage before the transfer is "3 times", and CU3 stores "3 times" as the accumulated jackpot value. It is assumed that the number of jackpots in the call lamp 1000 provided corresponding to CU3 previously installed in the 11th series is "5 times", and CU3 stores "5 times" as the jackpot cumulative value.

As described above, CU3 can acquire the unit number from the holder substrate of the unit holder. In this case, upon acquiring a new machine number, the CU control unit 323 updates the machine number 3237 stored in the CU storage unit 3231 with the newly acquired machine number. That is, it can be determined that the own device has been relocated based on the fact that the serial number 3237 stored in the CU storage unit 3231 has changed (updated to a different number). Then, the CU control unit 323 clears the gaming machine data stored in the gaming machine database 3238 of the CU storage unit 3231, and clears the gaming information cumulative data stored in the gaming information cumulative database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231. clear.

Since the game information accumulated data is cleared, if the CU3 installed in the 1st series is moved to the 11th series, the jackpot accumulated value stored in the CU3 becomes "0 times", and the call installed in the 11th series Since the number of jackpots of the lamp 1000 is "5 times", the number of jackpots is inconsistent. Similarly, when the CU3 installed in the 11th series is moved to the 1st series, the accumulated jackpot value stored in the CU3 becomes "0", and the number of jackpots of the call lamp 1000 installed in the 1st series becomes " 3 times”, there is a discrepancy in the number of big hits.

Therefore, after CU3 is relocated, in order to prevent discrepancies in information between CU3 and call lamp 1000, as an initial setting process, information is stored between CU3 and call lamp 1000 in order to match the information. It is conceivable to initialize (clear) the game information stored in the game information. However, in this case, there is a problem that the game information stored in the call lamp 1000 is cleared even though the correspondence between the P table 2 and the call lamp 1000 has not changed.

Therefore, after the CU3 is relocated, the CU3 requests the P machine 2 to transmit the latest gaming machine data held by the P machine 2, and acquires the latest gaming machine data from the P machine 2. By doing so, it is conceivable that CU3 acquires game information. However, since it is not possible to obtain all the gaming machine data before CU3 is relocated, an error corresponding to the unacquirable gaming machine data occurs in the gaming information accumulated value calculated by CU3 in the counting process. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above problem is solved as follows.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram of game information recovery in this embodiment.
As described above, the liquid crystal unit 500 is detachably attached to the P table 2 . However, in normal store operations, the liquid crystal unit 500 is rarely removed from the P stand 2 . In other words, in normal operation of the arcade, even if the CU3 is relocated to another gaming machine, the liquid crystal unit 500 is rarely relocated together. Therefore, the description will be made on the premise that the liquid crystal unit 500 is not relocated.

Therefore, when transferring CU3 to each gaming machine, CU3 acquires the machine number from the holder board of the unit holder at the relocation destination, and then acquires the machine number stored in the gaming machine database 3238 of the CU storage unit 3231. Along with clearing the data, the game information accumulation data stored in the game information accumulation database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231 is cleared.

Next, CU3 acquires the game information accumulation data including the latest game information accumulation value from the liquid crystal unit 500 attached to the P stand 2 of the relocation destination, and stores it in the game information accumulation database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231. .

Then, CU3 executes information matching processing for matching information with the call lamp 1000, and matches game information between CU3 and the call lamp 1000. FIG. The liquid crystal unit 500 is configured to be connectable to the CU 3, and corresponds to a display control device capable of storing aggregated information (gaming information accumulated data) obtained by aggregating game information and capable of controlling the display of a predetermined display device (liquid crystal display 504). do.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a data configuration example of the liquid crystal unit storage section 5021 provided in the liquid crystal unit control section 502 of the liquid crystal unit 500. As shown in FIG. The liquid crystal unit storage section 5021 is a storage device including memories such as ROM, EEPROM, and RAM.

The liquid crystal unit storage unit 5021 stores, as a program, a liquid crystal unit exception processing program 5023 that is read by the liquid crystal unit control unit 502 (a processing unit included in the liquid crystal unit control unit 502) and executed as liquid crystal unit exception processing. there is In addition, game information data 5024 and game information cumulative data 5025 are stored in the liquid crystal unit storage section 5021 as data.

In this embodiment, the CU control section 323 causes the command transmission/reception section 335 to transmit the game information included in the received gaming machine data to the liquid crystal unit 500 every time the gaming machine data is received from the P machine 2 . The liquid crystal unit control section 502 causes the liquid crystal unit storage section 5021 to store the game information data 5024 received from the CU 3 via the command transmission/reception section 506 . In addition, the CU control section 323 executes counting processing based on the received game information data 5024, generates game information accumulation data 5025 including the calculated game information accumulation value, and stores the game information accumulation data 5025 in the liquid crystal unit storage section 5021.

Here, the game information data 5024 includes game information such as the number of launches, the number of big hits, the number of probability variations, the number of starts, and the like. These pieces of game information are game information data for the game machine, and thus correspond to machine data.

FIG. 58 shows the flow of the CU exception processing executed by the CU control unit 323, the call lamp exception processing executed by the processing unit of the call lamp 1000, and the liquid crystal unit exception processing executed by the liquid crystal unit control unit 502 in this embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of . These processes are processes executed as subroutines of the main process in each device. In this drawing, the processing of the liquid crystal unit 500 is shown on the left, the processing of the CU3 is shown in the center, and the processing of the calling lamp 1000 is shown on the right.

The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the serial number 3237 stored in the CU storage unit 3231 has changed (K1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the unit number 3237 stored in the CU storage unit 3231 has changed due to the relocation of the own unit.

If it is determined that the machine number 3237 has changed (K3; Yes), the CU control section 323 executes game information accumulated data initialization processing (K5). Specifically, the game information accumulation data stored in the game information accumulation database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231 is cleared.

Next, the CU control section 323 requests the liquid crystal unit 500 for game information accumulated data (K7). When the liquid crystal unit control section 502 receives a request for the accumulated game information data from the CU3, it extracts the accumulated game information data 5025 including the latest accumulated value of the game information from the liquid crystal unit storage section 5021 (J1). The data 5025 is transmitted to CU3 via the command transmission/reception unit 506 (J3).

Next, the liquid crystal unit control section 502 determines whether or not to end the process (J5), and if it determines to continue the process (J5; No), returns the process to J1. On the other hand, if it is determined to end the processing (J5; Yes), the liquid crystal unit exception processing ends.

When the CU control section 323 acquires the cumulative game information data from the liquid crystal unit 500 , it stores it in the cumulative game information database 3239 of the CU storage section 3231 .

After that, the CU control unit 323 counts based on the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2 using the gaming information cumulative value included in the gaming information cumulative data 5025 acquired from the liquid crystal unit 500 as reference information in the above-described CU processing. Processing should be executed. That is, by adding the game information count value included in the gaming machine data received from the P machine 2 to the game information cumulative value included in the game information cumulative data 5025 acquired from the liquid crystal unit 500, the game The information accumulation value should be calculated.

Next, CU control unit 323 executes the following processing as information matching processing for matching information with calling lamp 1000 . Specifically, the CU control unit 323 sends a recovery confirmation notification to the calling lamp 1000 via the obtained serial communication unit 334 (K9).

Next, the CU control unit 323 executes external transmission data generation processing (K11). Specifically, as the external transmission data using the game information accumulated value included in the game information accumulated data acquired from the liquid crystal unit 500 as the recovery information, for example, the first type external transmission data among the external transmission data shown in FIG. Data (FIG. 51(1)) is generated. Then, CU control unit 323 causes the generated external transmission data to be transmitted to calling lamp 1000 via serial communication unit 334 .

Next, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not to end the process (K15), and if it determines to continue the process (K15; No), returns the process to K1. On the other hand, if it is determined to end the processing (K15; Yes), the CU exception processing ends.

When the processing unit of call lamp 1000 receives the recovery confirmation notification from CU3 (L1; Yes), it determines whether external transmission data has been received from CU3 (L3). Yes), the recovery determination process is executed (L5).

If it is determined that the recovery condition is satisfied (L7; Yes), the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 executes recovery processing (L9).

Next, the processing unit of the call lamp 1000 determines whether or not to end the process (L11), and if it determines to continue the process (L11; No), returns the process to L1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing should be terminated (L11; Yes), the call lamp exception processing is terminated.

In the fourth embodiment, the CU3 is capable of receiving game information from the P machine 2 and has a CU storage unit 3231 that stores a machine number 3237 that can identify the P machine 2 . In addition, the CU control unit 323 executes tallying processing based on the received gaming information. A game information accumulated data initialization process for initializing the game information accumulated data corresponding to the totalized result is executed.

According to this, even if the machine number is changed due to the relocation of the CU3, etc., it is possible to appropriately manage the tally result of tallying the game information received from the gaming machine.

[5. Modifications of Second to Fourth Embodiments]
Embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above embodiments, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the scope of the present invention. Another embodiment will be described below. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[5-1. External transmission data]
The configuration of the externally transmitted data as a telegram described in the above embodiment is not limited to that shown in the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the serial number may be included in the external transmission data in the above-described embodiment.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of external transmission data in this case. This figure shows the external transmission data corresponding to the three types of external transmission data from the first type to the third type of external transmission data shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 59(1) to 59(3), the first to third external transmission data have a sequence section between the message length section and the data section. A sequence number is stored in the sequence part. The sequence number is a number (that is, a serial number) that is incremented by "1" every time the CU3 sends external transmission data to the external device.

In this case, the external device (management computer 900 or call lamp 1000) that has received the externally transmitted data from CU3 refers to the sequence number stored in the sequence part of the received externally transmitted data, so that the externally transmitted data is received in the correct order from CU3. It is possible to determine whether external transmission data has been received. If there is a missing sequence number, it can be determined that the external transmission data corresponding to the missing sequence number has failed to be received, and the external device requests CU3 to retransmit the external transmission data. be able to.

In this case, for example, in the above-described third embodiment, after the management computer 900 executes the reception error processing, if the problem such as communication failure is resolved, the management computer 900 resends the external transmission data to the CU3. CU3, which receives the retransmission request, may retransmit to the management computer 900 the externally transmitted data whose transmission has failed.

Moreover, in the external transmission data in the above-described embodiment, the external transmission data may include the STX, message length, and sequence number in the header portion. That is, the external transmission data may be composed of a header portion, a data portion, a footer portion, and an error detection portion. How the electronic message is constructed can be changed as appropriate according to the system to be designed.

[5-2. Send data settings]
In the unit setting data 3236 described with reference to FIG. 52, "1" is set as the data type No. for transmission at the time of setting abnormality. is transmitted from CU3 to the external device. However, this setting is not necessarily required. For example, "3" is set as the data type No. for transmission in the event of a setting error, and in the event of an error, the data section contains only recovery information. The external transmission data may be transmitted from CU3 to the external device.

Also, if a reception error occurs in the external device and the reception error processing is executed, after the problem such as communication failure is resolved, the external device will resend the failed external transmission data to CU3. , and the external transmission data that could not be transmitted may be retransmitted from the CU3 to the external device.

In this case, if the system is constructed so as to transmit the externally transmitted data including the sequence part illustrated in FIG. However, by receiving notification of the sequence number of the externally transmitted data whose reception has failed from the external device, it becomes easy to identify the externally transmitted data that could not be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the management computer 900 may issue a recovery information request requesting the CU3 to send external transmission data including recovery information instead of the normal data abnormality notification. . In this case, in the data type No. for transmission at setting abnormality of the unit setting data 3236, the No. 1 of the first type external transmission data containing normal information and recovery information in the data part or only the recovery information is set as data. No. 3 is set for the third type external transmission data included in the unit, and when a request for recovery information is received from the management computer 900, data for transmission at setting abnormality stored in the unit setting data 3236 is set. It is only necessary to generate and transmit data for external transmission in the event of an abnormality of a type corresponding to the type number.

Alternatively, the management computer 900 may issue a resend request to the CU3 to resend the external transmission data determined to be abnormal. In this case, the data type No. for transmission at setting abnormality of the unit setting data 3236 is set to No. 1 of the first type external transmission data which includes normal information and recovery information in the data portion, or only normal information is set to the data portion. No. 2 is set for the type 2 external transmission data included in the unit setting data 3236, and when a request for information for recovery is received from the management computer 900, the data type for transmission at setting abnormality stored in the unit setting data 3236 is set. It is sufficient to generate and transmit data for abnormal external transmission of the type corresponding to No.

[5-3. recovery process]
In the above embodiment, the method of causing the external device to perform recovery processing when CU3 is relocated is not limited to the method illustrated in FIG.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram of recovery of game information in the modified example.
In this method, game information is transmitted in advance from the CU 3 to the management computer 900 and stored in the management computer 900 for each gaming machine. When it becomes necessary to relocate CU3, CU3 acquires the machine number from the holder board of the unit holder to which it is relocated, and then retrieves the gaming machine data stored in the gaming machine database 3238 of the CU storage unit 3231. Along with clearing, the game information accumulation data stored in the game information accumulation database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231 is cleared.

Next, the CU 3 requests the liquid crystal unit 500 attached to the P table 2 of the relocation destination for the game information accumulated data, and acquires the first game information accumulated data including the latest game information accumulated value from the liquid crystal unit 500. , is stored in the game information accumulation database 3239 . In addition, CU3 requests the game information accumulated data from the management computer 900, acquires the second game information accumulated data including the latest game information accumulated value corresponding to the P table 2 of the transfer destination from the management computer 900, and performs the game. Stored in the information accumulation database 3239 . This second game information accumulation data is also transmitted to the call lamp 1000 .

After that, CU3 executes match determination processing to determine whether or not the first accumulated game information data obtained from the liquid crystal unit 500 and the second accumulated game information data obtained from the management computer 900 match each other. When it is determined that they match, the CU3 notifies the management computer 900 and the call lamp 1000 of the determination result of "match". The call lamp 1000 receiving this notification executes recovery processing using the second game information accumulated data acquired from the management computer 900 .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first game information accumulated data and the second game information accumulated data do not match, the CU3 notifies the management computer 900 and the call lamp 1000 of the determination result of "mismatch". In this case, the management computer 900 executes processing for confirming the accumulated game information data. When correct accumulated game information data is obtained by confirmation, the accumulated game information data is transmitted to the call lamp 1000 and CU3. Then, CU3 stores the accumulated game information data received from the management computer 900 in the CU storage unit 3231, and the call lamp 1000 executes recovery processing using the accumulated game information data received from the management computer 900. FIG.

In this case, the call lamp 1000 may execute the match determination process instead of the CU3.

In this case, the CU3 requests the liquid crystal unit 500 attached to the P table 2 of the relocation destination for the game information accumulated data, and acquires the first game information accumulated data including the latest game information accumulated value from the liquid crystal unit 500. , the acquired first game information accumulated data is transmitted to the call lamp 1000 . In addition, CU3 requests the game information accumulated data from the management computer 900, and sends the second game information accumulated data including the latest game information accumulated value corresponding to the P table 2 of the relocation destination from the management computer 900 to the call lamp 1000. send to

The call lamp 1000 executes match determination processing for determining whether or not the first accumulated game information data obtained from the CU3 and the second accumulated game information data obtained from the management computer 900 match. When it is determined that the first game information accumulated data and the second game information accumulated data do not match, the call lamp 1000 notifies the management computer 900 and CU3 of the determination result of "mismatch". In this case, the management computer 900 executes processing for confirming the accumulated game information data. When correct accumulated game information data is obtained by confirmation, the accumulated game information data is transmitted to the call lamp 1000 and CU3. Then, CU3 stores the accumulated game information data received from the management computer 900 in the CU storage unit 3231, and the call lamp 1000 executes recovery processing using the accumulated game information data received from the management computer 900. FIG.

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment and modified example, when the CU 3 executes the game information accumulated data initialization process according to the change of the machine number, the example of acquiring the game information accumulated data from the liquid crystal unit 500 is given. explained. However, instead of this, the cumulative game information data may be acquired from the call lamp 1000 when the CU 3 executes the game information cumulative data initialization processing according to the change of the machine number. In this case, the call lamp 1000 is configured to be connectable to the CU 3, can store aggregated information (gaming information cumulative data) obtained by aggregating game information, and can display and control a predetermined display device (display unit of the call lamp 1000). It corresponds to a display control device.

In the above embodiment, the case where the liquid crystal unit 500 is not relocated even if the CU3 is relocated has been described as an example. . In this case, the CU 3 acquires the game information accumulated data of the game machine from the management computer 900 at the game machine of the relocation destination, transmits the game information accumulated data to the call lamp 1000, and causes the recovery process to be executed. All you have to do is

[5-4. Display control of liquid crystal unit]
In the above embodiment, the display control of the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 may be performed by the CU3 connected to the liquid crystal unit 500. FIG. Specifically, for example, the CU control unit 323 is configured with a liquid crystal display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 . Then, the liquid crystal display control section of the CU control section 323 transmits a display control signal to the connected liquid crystal unit 500, thereby controlling the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 to display game information. good too.

In other words, the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 may be configured as independent gaming devices, or the CU3 and the liquid crystal unit 500 may be configured to control the display of the liquid crystal unit 500 on the CU3 side. may be configured as a so-called integrated game device.

[5-5. Delete gaming information]
In the above embodiment, the liquid crystal unit control section 502, based on the erasing instruction information (erasing instruction signal) output from the host device such as the management computer 900, sets the table data stored in the liquid crystal unit storage section 5021. The game information data 5024 may be erased (cleared). In this case, the machine data corresponding to all types of game information may be deleted, or only the machine data corresponding to some types of game information may be deleted.

[5-6. non-transmission target]
In the above embodiment, among the game information defined in the game information management table 3234 of FIG. 49, game information with a low rank (e.g., launch information of rank D) is excluded from being transmitted to the external device. However, regardless of the rank, the game information set by the store clerk, manager, or the like may be excluded from the targets of transmission to the external device. This setting may be realized by a setting remote controller carried by the store clerk, may be realized by a setting operation on the CU3, or may be realized by setting instructions from various management devices (upper device) installed in the store. You may

[5-7. Non-aggregation target]
In the above embodiment, the game information (shooting information, error information, etc.) selectively determined from the game information defined in the game information management table 3234 of FIG. As explained above, game information set by a store clerk, manager, or the like may be excluded from the targets of the tallying process, similarly to the non-transmission targets described above.

[5-8. Transmission cycle of external transmission data]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the CU 3 transmits the external transmission data in the same period as the reception period of the gaming machine data from the P machine 2 . However, it is not always necessary to transmit the external transmission data in the same period as the gaming machine data reception period.

Specifically, the external transmission data may be transmitted at a cycle longer than the reception cycle of the gaming machine data. In this case, for example, the game machine data received from the P machine 2 every 200 ms is accumulated and stored in the CU storage unit 3231 . Then, at the timing when the game machine data is received a specified number of times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the game machine data for the most recent specified number of times stored in the CU storage unit 3231 is read out and totalization processing is executed. The transmission data may be transmitted to an external device.

In this case, the gaming machine data for the prescribed number of times is accumulated (stored) in the CU3, and each time the gaming machine data is received for the prescribed number of times, the counting process is executed and the external transmission data is transmitted. . Therefore, for example, if the specified number of times is set to 5, the transmission cycle of the external transmission data is "1000 ms" for the reception cycle of the gaming machine data "200 ms".

[5-9. relay device]
In the above embodiment, the relay device 1200 constituted by the main controller, the island computer, etc. has been described as only relaying data between the CU 3 and the management computer 900 . However, since the relay device 1200 is also an external device, the relay device 1200 may function as a management device and perform the same processing as the management computer 900 in the above embodiment.

[5-10. Communication standard]
In the above embodiment, the serial communication unit 334 communicates with an external device in accordance with, for example, the RS-485 serial communication standard, but the serial communication standard is not limited to this. For example, in addition to RS-485, communication with external devices conforming to other types of serial communication standards such as RS-232 (RS-232C) and RS-422 (RS-422A (EIA-422A)) is performed. You can design the system so that

In addition, it is not always necessary to transmit the external transmission data from the CU3 to the external device by serial communication, but by constructing a system capable of parallel communication, the external transmission data is transmitted from the CU3 to the external device by parallel communication. may

[5-11. Game information accumulation target range]
The target range (target period) for accumulating various types of game information in the tallying process described in the above embodiment can be set and changed as appropriate. For example, it may be set in units of business days of the store, or may be set in long-term units such as one week or one month. In addition to this, the period from installation of the P machine 2 (gaming machine) to relocation (removal) may be set as the target range.

Further, the target range may be freely set by the host computer such as the hall computer or the management computer 900 . In this case, for example, according to the operation of the manager of the store, etc., the target range of accumulation is selected and determined on the upper device side, and setting information (setting data) for applying the target range to CU3 is transmitted to the upper device. It suffices to transmit from the device to CU3.

[5-12. Initialization of game information accumulated value]
In the above embodiment, it was explained that the initialization process for initializing the game information cumulative value (aggregation result by the aggregation process) is executed in the CU3 based on the change in the machine number or the holder ID. It goes without saying that the initialization process may be executed on the CU3 side to initialize the game information cumulative value regardless of the recovery of the game information.

Further, when the game information accumulated value is initialized on the CU3 side, the initialization command (initialization command) for instructing the initialization of the game information accumulated value is output from the CU3 to the liquid crystal unit 500. The unit 500 may be caused to initialize the game information cumulative value.

Further, an initialization command (initialization command) for instructing initialization of the game information accumulated value is transmitted from a higher-level device such as the hall computer or the management computer 900 to the CU3, thereby initializing the game information accumulated value in the CU3. You may make it change.

[5-13. Acquisition of game information cumulative value]
In the above embodiment, an example in which the CU3 acquires the gaming information cumulative value from the liquid crystal unit 500 has been described. , the game information cumulative value stored in the external device may be acquired.

[6. Fifth embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described.

[6-1. Overview]
In the following, the gaming machines are classified into two categories, namely, "managed gaming machines" and "unmanaged gaming machines", and the distinction between managed gaming machines and unmanaged gaming machines is referred to as "gaming machine classification".

A managed gaming machine is a gaming machine that is collectively managed by an organization that manages gaming machines operated by an organization in which multiple gaming machine manufacturers are affiliated, such as the gaming machine management server 802, the content management server 903, and the settlement server 905. means The enclosed circulation type gaming machine described in the above embodiment is included in the management gaming machine.
An unmanaged gaming machine means a gaming machine that is not collectively managed by an organization or the like that manages gaming machines. Unmanaged gaming machines include touch-type gaming machines currently in operation (current gaming machines).

In addition, in the present embodiment, two gaming machines of different types, a "pachinko machine" and a "slot machine", are assumed for each gaming machine (managed gaming machine/non-managed gaming machine) of each gaming machine category, and this pachinko machine The distinction between machines/slot machines is referred to as "game machine classification".

Pachinko machines and slot machines use different game media (pachinko balls for pachinko machines and medals for slot machines). Since pachinko balls and medals are different in size, currently, game devices such as card units and lending machines installed alongside game machines are designed to be compatible with each game medium. That is, in the current gaming machines, the pachinko machine uses a game device dedicated to the pachinko machine, and the slot machine uses a game device dedicated to the slot machine.

On the other hand, in enclosed circulation type gaming machines as managed gaming machines, game media are enclosed inside the gaming machine, and players can play games without touching the game media with their fingers. For this reason, the difference in game media does not matter, and the physical limitation of the difference in size of the game media is eliminated. It is now possible to use these gaming devices in common.

However, in order to enable the game to be played on the corresponding gaming machine, the processing executed on the gaming device side must correspond to the type of gaming machine. In other words, if a game device is commonly used for different types of gaming machines, it must be possible to execute processing corresponding to each type of gaming machine. This embodiment is an embodiment of a game system including a game device capable of solving such problems.

In this embodiment, the game machine is a managed game machine. The type of gaming machine under management (pachinko machine under management/slot machine under management) is defined as the type of gaming machine, and is common to the pachinko machine under management (first management gaming machine) and the management slot machine (second management gaming machine). Register the type of gaming machine that corresponds to the card unit designed to be used for

[6-2. System configuration]
FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the card unit 3 (CU3), which is an example of a gaming device, and the managed pachinko machine (P machine 2), which is an example of a managed gaming machine in this embodiment. The functional units of each device are substantially the same as the functional units in the block diagram shown in FIG. 42, but the configuration is partly different, so the different parts from FIG. 42 will be mainly described.

Further, here, the P machine 2 explained in the above embodiment is assumed to be a management pachinko machine which is a kind of management gaming machine, and the description will focus on the configuration of the P machine 2 and CU3, but it is a kind of management gaming machine. Management slot machines can also be similarly designed following the configuration of the P units 2 . Therefore, illustration and description of the configuration of the management slot machine are omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, a frame control board 17B is provided in place of the payout control board 17 in the P stand 2 . Further, the frame control board 17B is configured to have a frame control section 171B instead of the payout control section 171. As shown in FIG. The frame control board 17B (frame control unit 171B) is a control board (control device) for the purpose of controlling the game frame, collects information transmitted from the main control board 16, and sends information based on the collected result to the CU3. , and performs communication control (transmission/reception control) for receiving information transmitted from CU3. Further, the frame control board 17B (frame control section 171B) controls a circulation system for circulating the pachinko balls sealed inside the P table 2 .

In this embodiment, the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B are configured to be capable of two-way communication through serial communication. As will be described later, data corresponding to internal notifications such as game machine installation information internal notifications and game machine information internal notifications are transmitted from the main control board 16 to the frame control board 17B. From the frame control board 17B to the main control board 16, as will be described later, a gaming machine installation information internal response to the gaming machine installation information internal notification, a game machine information internal response to the gaming machine information internal notification, etc. data corresponding to the internal response of

Also, in this embodiment, the P unit 2 and the CU 3 are configured not to perform encryption key authentication via the key management server 800 described with reference to FIG. Therefore, CU3 does not have a functional unit necessary for performing authentication with a higher-level device (management device). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the CU3 does not have the security (SC) board 325 shown in FIGS. Data transmitted from the command communication unit 180 is input to the CU control unit 323 via the PIF circuit 326, and data transmitted from the CU control unit 323 is input to the command communication unit 180 of the P unit 2 via the PIF circuit 326. configured to be

[6-3. Communication between main control board and frame control board]
In this embodiment, the managed gaming machine (managed pachinko machine/managed slot machine) carries out serial communication between the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B to transmit message data between main frames. In this embodiment, as an example, the following communication conditions are applied.
(1) Communication speed: 38400 [bps]
(2) Bit configuration: Start bit: 1, Data bit: 8, Stop bit: 1, Parity: None (3) Communication method: Asynchronous serial communication method (4) Communication control: Half-duplex communication (5) Communication cycle ( Transmission cycle): 100 milliseconds [ms]

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of inter-main frame message data, which is data transmitted between the main control board 16 of the P platform 2 and the frame control board 17B in this embodiment.
The inter-main-frame message data is frame data configured as one message, and includes, for example, a message length portion, a command portion, a serial number portion, a data portion, and an error detection portion.

FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining each constituent part of the inter-main-frame telegram data described above. It shows a table in which the meaning and are associated with each other.

The message length part is a configuration part in which the length from the message length part of the message data between main frames to the error detection part is stored as the message length. , is expressed with a data length of 1 byte.

The command part is the command code of the message data between main frames, and the command code of the message is represented by a data length of 1 byte.

The serial number part is the communication number of the message data between main frames. expressed.

The data section is a component that stores the main data transmitted between the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B in the inter-frame message data, and is represented by a data length of 1 byte to N bytes. . Note that the value of "N" can be changed as appropriate.

The error detection section is a storage section for storing error detection information (error detection information) of inter-frame telegram data, and an error detection code such as a checksum is represented by a data length of 1 byte.

It is assumed that the above inter-main-frame message data is always completed in one frame and is not divided and transmitted. In addition, the data must be received by the error detection unit within a predetermined time (for example, 20 [ms], although it depends on the data length of the data part) after receiving the data of the telegram length part of the inter-frame telegram data. If it is not possible, the received data up to that point is discarded, and data reception is restarted from the telegram length part.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of gaming machine installation information internal notification data, which is a type of inter-main frame message data.
The name of the gaming machine installation information internal notification data is "game machine installation information internal notification", and the transmission direction of the data is "main control board→frame control board". The purpose of the data is "notification of gaming machine installation information from the main control board to the frame control board".

Here, the “gaming machine installation information” is installation information related to the gaming machine installed corresponding to CU3. In this embodiment, the game machine installation information includes a "main control chip ID (main chip ID) number" which is a chip ID stored in the main control board 16 of the game machine, and a main control chip ID number of the game machine. It includes a “main control CPU manufacturer code” that is the code of the manufacturer that manufactured the CPU possessed by the unit 161, and a “main control CPU model code” that is the model code of the CPU possessed by the main control unit 161 of the game machine. be

The gaming machine installation information described above is merely an example, and other information can be included in the gaming machine installation information. For example, in addition to the above information, or instead of the above information, "game machine specific information" as information that can specify which type of gaming machine is a managed pachinko machine or managed slot machine and "model information" that can specify the model (model name) of the gaming machine may be included in the gaming machine installation information.

In the gaming machine installation information internal notification data, a data number number, a data name of the data, a data length of the data, a format of the data, and contents of the data are determined in association with each other. there is

The format includes "BIN" indicating binary data (decimal representation), "HEX" indicating binary data (hexadecimal representation), and 1-byte characters (ASCII code ) and “BYTE” indicating that it is an array of byte data. This is the same for other inter-main-frame message data.

The data of No "1" corresponds to the telegram length part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "telegram length", data length of "1 byte", format of "HEX", and content of "0x18".
The data of No. 2 is data corresponding to the command part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of 'command', a data length of '1 byte', a format of 'HEX', and a content of '0x01'.
Data of No "3" is data corresponding to the serial number part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "communication serial number", a data length of "1 byte", a format of "BIN", and a content of "fixed to 1".

Data of No. 4 to No. 6 are data corresponding to the data portion of FIG. 62, and are the data portion in which game machine installation information is stored. In particular,
The data of No "4" has a data name of "main control chip ID (main chip ID) number", a data length of "9 bytes", and a format of "BYTE".
The data of No "5" has a data name of "main control CPU manufacturer code", a data length of "3 bytes", and a format of "ASC".
The data of No "6" has a data name of "main control CPU type code", a data length of "8 bytes", and a format of "ASC".

The data of No "7" is data corresponding to the error detection part in FIG. result”.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of gaming machine installation information internal response data, which is a type of the inter-main frame message data.
The name of the gaming machine installation information internal response data is "gaming machine installation information internal response", and the transmission direction of the data is "frame control board→main control board". The purpose of the data is "response to the reception result of the gaming machine installation information internal notification from the frame control board to the main control board".

In the gaming machine installation information internal response data, a data number No., a data name of the data, a data length of the data, a format of the data, and contents of the data are determined in association with each other. there is

The data of No "1" corresponds to the telegram length part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "telegram length", data length of "1 byte", format of "HEX", and content of "0x05".
The data of No "2" corresponds to the command part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "command", a data length of "1 byte", a format of "HEX", and a content of "0x11".

Data of No "3" is data corresponding to the serial number part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "communication serial number", a data length of "1 byte", a format of "BIN", and a content of "fixed to 1".
The frame control board 17B responds with the communication serial number (fixed to 1) of the gaming machine installation information internal notification transmitted from the main control board 16 as it is. If the frame control board 17B receives a communication serial number other than "1" from the main control board 16 in the gaming machine installation information internal notification, the frame control board 17B does not respond.

The data of No. 4 is data corresponding to the data portion of FIG. 62, and stores the reception result of the gaming machine installation information. The data name is ``gaming machine installation information reception result'', the data length is ``1 byte'', the format is ``HEX'', and the content is ``receipt result 0x00=receipt OK''.

Data of No "5" is data corresponding to the error detection part in FIG. result”.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of gaming machine information internal notification data, which is a kind of inter-main-frame message data.
The name of the gaming machine information internal notification data is "game machine information internal notification", and the transmission direction of the data is "main control board→frame control board". The purpose of the data is "notification of gaming machine information from the main control board to the frame control board".

Here, the "gaming machine information" is information indicating the latest gaming machine status of the gaming machine installed corresponding to CU3, the latest gaming information, information for management in the hall computer/hall server (HC) ( HC information, fraud monitoring information, etc.).

The data of No "1" corresponds to the message length part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "telegram length", data length of "1 byte", format of "HEX", and content of "0x09 to 0x1D".
The data of No. 2 is data corresponding to the command part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of 'command', a data length of '1 byte', a format of 'HEX', and a content of '0x02'.

The data of No "3" is data corresponding to the serial number part in FIG. be.
The main control board 16 adds 1 to the communication serial number in the game machine information internal notification, and sets the number after "255" to "1".

The data of No. 4 to No. 12 are data corresponding to the data portion of FIG. 62, and are the data portion in which game machine information is stored. In particular,
Data of No "4" has a data name of "main control state 1", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The contents are "Bit 0: jackpot 1 (all jackpots), Bit 1: jackpot 2 (specific jackpot), Bit 2: jackpot 3 (variation time reduction jackpot), Bit 3: game machine state signal 1, Bit 4: game machine state signal 2 , Bit 5: gaming machine status signal 3, Bit 6: gaming machine status signal 4, and Bit 7: gaming machine status signal 5".

The data of No "5" has a data name of "main control state 2", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The contents are "Bit 0: Big hit + time reduction (variation time reduction), Bit 1: high probability, Bit 2: time reduction (variation time reduction), Bit 3: unused, Bit 4: game machine state signal 6, Bit 5: game machine state Signal 7, Bit 6: gaming machine status signal 8, Bit 7: gaming machine status signal 9".

The data of No. 6 has a data name of 'gaming machine error state', a data length of '1 byte', and a format of 'BIN'. The contents are "error code occurring in the game machine, Bits 0 to 5: error code, 000000 (B) = no error, Bit 6: 0 = frame control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = notification only, 1 = generation information + HC output, *Bits 0 to 7: 0 = no error occurred.

The data of No "7" has a data name of "unauthorized detection status 1", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The contents are "Bit 0: Incorrect board 1, Bit 1: Incorrect board 2, Bit 2: Incorrect board 3, Bit 3: Incorrect board 4, Bit 4: Incorrect board 5, Bit 5: Incorrect board 6, Bit 6: Unused, Bit 7: Unused". be.

Data of No. 8 to No. 12 are game information data of the gaming machine. In particular,
The data of No. 8 has a data name of "number of game information", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The content is "the number (n) of type information/count information, where n=0 to 10 (variable length)".

The data of No. 9 has a data name of 'type information 1', a data length of '1 byte', and a format of 'BIN'. The content is "type information 1".
The data of No "10" has a data name of "count information 1", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The content is "count information 1".

Data with No "11" has a data name of "type information n", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The content is "type information n".
The data of No "12" has a data name of "count information n", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The content is "count information n".

Data of No "13" is data corresponding to the error detection part in FIG. result”.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of gaming machine information internal response data, which is a kind of inter-main-frame message data.
The name of the gaming machine information internal response data is "gaming machine information internal response", and the transmission direction of the data is "frame control board→main control board". The purpose of the data is "receipt result of gaming machine information internal notification from the frame control board to the main control board & response of the frame control state".

The data of No "1" corresponds to the telegram length part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "telegram length", a data length of "1 byte", a format of "HEX", and a content of "0x06".
Data of No "2" is data corresponding to the command part in FIG. 62, and has a data name of "command", a data length of "1 byte", a format of "HEX", and a content of "0x12".

The data of No "3" is data corresponding to the serial number part in FIG. be.
The frame control board 17B responds with the communication serial number included in the gaming machine information internal notification received from the main control board 16 as it is. It should be noted that when a communication serial number that does not establish continuity is received from the main control board 16, no response is given.

Data of No "4" and No "5" are data corresponding to the data part of FIG.
The data of No. 4 has a data name of 'gaming machine information reception result', a data length of '1 byte', a format of 'HEX', and a content of 'receipt result 0x00=receipt OK'.
The data of No "5" has a data name of "frame control state", a data length of "1 byte", and a format of "BIN". The contents are "Bit: 0: Number of game balls exceeded, Bit 1 to Bit 7: unused".

The data of No "6" is data corresponding to the error detection part in FIG. result”.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of data communication between the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B.
When the power of the P units 2 is turned on, the P units 2 are activated after a maximum activation time of T [ms]. Then, the main control board 16 notifies the frame control board 17B of the gaming machine installation information. Specifically, the main control section 161 generates gaming machine installation information internal notification data corresponding to the gaming machine installation information internal notification described with reference to FIG. 64, and transmits the generated gaming machine installation information internal notification data to the frame control section 171B. The communication serial number at this time is assumed to be "1".

In response to this gaming machine installation information internal notification, the frame control board 17B responds to the main control board 16 with the gaming machine installation information internal response. Specifically, the frame control section 171B generates gaming machine installation information internal response data corresponding to the gaming machine installation information internal response described with reference to FIG. The communication serial number at this time is assumed to be "1", which is the same as the game machine installation information internal notification.

At the timing when 100 [ms] has passed from the execution timing of the game machine installation information internal notification, the main control board 16 performs the first game machine information internal notification to the frame control board 17B. Specifically, the main control section 161 generates gaming machine information internal notification data corresponding to the gaming machine information internal notification described with reference to FIG. 66, and transmits the generated gaming machine information internal notification data to the frame control section 171B. The communication serial number at this time is assumed to be "1".

In response to this game machine information internal notification, the frame control board 17B makes a game machine information internal response to the main control board 16 . Specifically, the frame control section 171B generates gaming machine information internal response data corresponding to the gaming machine information internal response described with reference to FIG. The communication serial number at this time is assumed to be "1", which is the same as the game machine information internal notification.

At the timing when 100 [ms] have passed since the execution timing of the first internal gaming machine information notification, the main control board 16 issues the second internal gaming machine information notification to the frame control board 17B. Specifically, the main control section 161 generates gaming machine information internal notification data corresponding to the gaming machine information internal notification described with reference to FIG. 66, and transmits the generated gaming machine information internal notification data to the frame control section 171B. The communication serial number at this time is assumed to be "2".

In response to this game machine information internal notification, the frame control board 17B makes a game machine information internal response to the main control board 16 . Specifically, the frame control section 171B generates gaming machine information internal response data corresponding to the gaming machine information internal response described with reference to FIG. The communication serial number at this time is assumed to be "2", which is the same as the game machine information internal notification.

In the same manner, the main control board 16 notifies the frame control board 17B of the gaming machine information at a communication cycle (transmission cycle) of 100 [ms]. A gaming machine information internal response is made to the control board 16 .

[6-4. Communication between management game machine and CU]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of inter-game-machine-CU message data, which is data transmitted between the managed gaming machine and the CU3 in this embodiment.
The gaming machine CU-to-CU electronic message data can have, for example, the same data configuration as the inter-main-frame electronic message data described with reference to FIG. Specifically, it can be configured as frame data having a message length section, a command section, a serial number section, a data section X, and an error detection section. The inter-game machine CU message data includes data transmitted from the frame control board 17B to the CU3 and data transmitted from the CU3 to the frame control board 17B.

FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining types of game machine CU electronic message data, and shows a table in which names, data sections X, transmission directions, and contents are associated with each other.
The name "game machine installation information external notification" has a transmission direction of "frame control board → CU", and is similar to the game machine installation information internal notification sent from the main control board 16 to the frame control board 17B. Information such as gaming machine installation information is stored in the data section X for the purpose of notifying the installation information from the gaming machine to the outside (here, CU3).

The name "game machine information external notification" has a transmission direction of "frame control board→CU", and is similar to the game machine information internal notification sent from the main control board 16 to the frame control board 17B. Information such as gaming machine information is stored in the data section X for the purpose of notifying the gaming machine to the outside (here, CU3).

The name "counting information external notification" has a transmission direction of "frame control board → CU", and information (hereinafter referred to as "counting information") regarding the counting of game media executed in the gaming machine is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside ( Here, counting information including counting preparation information and counting execution information is stored in the data section X for the purpose of notifying the CU3).

The gaming machine is provided with a counting button (for example, counting button 28 in FIG. 61) for counting. In this embodiment, pressing the count button will be described as an example of the counting operation.

When the counting operation is detected, the frame control section 171B of the gaming machine counts the number of game media as the counted number of game media, and notifies CU3 of the count value as the counted number of game media. When the gaming machine is a managed pachinko machine, the number of game balls is counted as the number of balls to be counted according to the counting operation, and the count value is notified to CU3 as the number of balls to be counted. Also, if the gaming machine is a management slot machine, the number of game medals is counted as the number of counted medals according to the counting operation, and the count value is notified to CU3 as the number of counted medals.

The counting preparation information is information for notifying the CU 3 from the game machine that it is in a state of preparation for counting the game media, and is information for setting the number of game media to be counted to "0".

The counting execution information is information for notifying the CU 3 from the gaming machine that the game media has been counted, and is information that sets the number of game media to be counted to “α”. “α” is the unit number of game media counted, which means the number of counted game media per game. In this embodiment, in principle, each time the counting button is pressed, a first predetermined number is counted, and this first predetermined number corresponds to the unit counting game media count α. The number of game media to be counted is the number of balls to be counted in the managed pachinko machine, and the number of tokens to be counted in the managed slot machine.

In this case, the managed gaming machine is designed such that the unit counted number of game media α is set to, for example, 250 balls for the managed pachinko machine and 50 tokens for the managed slot machine. can be kept

Upon receiving the counting execution information from the frame control board 17B, the CU 3 updates the number of possessed game media corresponding to the card being accepted (hereinafter referred to as "the number of card possessed game media"). Specifically, the number of unit counted game media α included in the received counting execution information is added to the current number of card-held game media to update the number of card-held game media. In this case, if the gaming machine is a managed pachinko machine, the number of units counted balls included in the received counting execution information is added to update the number of balls in the card, and if the gaming machine is a managed slot machine, , the number of unit counted medals included in the received counting execution information is added to update the number of card-held medals.

The name ``rental information external notification'' has a transmission direction of ``CU→frame control board'', and information regarding the lending of game media (hereinafter referred to as ``rental information'') is transmitted from the CU3 to the outside (here, the frame control board 17B). Lending information including lending preparation information and lending execution information is stored in the data section X for the purpose of notifying the customer.

In this embodiment, lending means lending out game media using the remaining amount of deposit. Further, in this embodiment, touching an icon (button) (hereinafter referred to as a "rental icon") for renting a game medium displayed on the liquid crystal display (touch panel) 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 is indicated. , will be described as an example of the lending operation.

For example, if the gaming machine is a managed pachinko machine, a button icon for lending pachinko balls (for example, the ball rental icon in FIG. 79(1)) is displayed as a lending icon on the liquid crystal display 504, If the machine is a managed slot machine, a button icon for lending out medals (for example, the token lending icon in FIG. 79(2)) is displayed as a lending icon on the liquid crystal display 504 . Instead of doing this, the CU3 may be provided with a lending button as a physical button, and the pressing of this lending button may be regarded as the lending operation.

When the lending operation is performed, the balance (prepaid balance) owned by the player in association with the card is consumed, and game media (pachinko balls in the managed pachinko machine/medals in the managed slot machine) are lent out. The points corresponding to the rented gaming media rented out in this way (loan points) are converted into game points (game points), which are points for games, and are played on the corresponding managed gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as " It is possible to use it for "rental games".

The lending preparation information is information for notifying the gaming machine from the CU3 that it is in a state of preparation for lending out game media, and is information that sets the number of lending game media to "0".

The lending execution information is information for notifying the management gaming machine from the CU 3 of execution of lending game media, and is information in which the number of lending game media is set to "β". Here, "β" is the number of unit lent out game media, which means the number of lent out game media per time. In this embodiment, in principle, every time the lending icon is touched, a second predetermined number of game media are lent out, and this second predetermined number corresponds to the unit number of lent out game media β. The number of lent game media is the number of lent balls for the managed pachinko machine, and the number of lent medals for the managed slot machine.

Current payment machines currently installed in stores are designed to use 1000 yen bills and 100 yen coins as currencies, and do not support payment of fractions of less than 100 yen. If this current settlement machine is used as it is at a store with managed gaming machines, it is necessary to prevent the settlement of fractions of less than 100 yen. For this reason, it is desirable that the number of unit lending game media β is set to a number corresponding to the lending rate.

Therefore, the unit number of game media β to be lent out is, for example, set to 125 balls (for 500 yen) in a managed pachinko machine (rental rate: 4 yen), and as a unit in a managed pachinko machine (rental rate: 1 yen). The number of balls to be borrowed should be "200 balls (worth 200 yen)". In addition, the managed slot machine (loan rate: 20 yen) has a unit loan medal count of "50 coins (1000 yen worth)", and the managed slot machine (loan rate: 5 yen) has a unit loan medal count of "200 coins (1000 yen worth)". )"And it is sufficient.

Note that if a fare adjustment machine capable of adjusting fractions of less than 100 yen is used at a store with managed gaming machines, the above restriction will be removed. may be the number of For example, for a managed pachinko machine (lending rate: 1 yen), the unit number of lent balls may be set to "125 balls (for 125 yen)" in the same way as for a managed pachinko machine (lending rate: 4 yen).

Upon receiving the lending execution information from the CU3, the frame control board 17B updates the game points (the number of game media) based on the number of unit lending game media included in the received lending execution information. Specifically, when the gaming machine is a managed pachinko machine, the game points (number of game balls) are updated based on the unit number of lent balls included in the received lending execution information, and the gaming machine is a managed slot machine. In some cases, the game points (the number of game medals) are updated based on the number of unit loaned medals included in the received lending execution information.

The name ``rental information external response'' is data whose transmission direction is ``frame control board→CU'' and is data for the gaming machine to respond to CU3 with the reception result of the lending information external notification. The lending receipt result including the receipt result is stored in the data section X.

The lending preparation receipt result is a response (for example, receipt result=0) to the lending preparation information notified from CU3, and is information for notifying CU3 that the gaming machine is in a state of preparation for lending game media. is.
The lending execution receipt result is a response to the lending execution information notified from CU3 (for example, receipt result = 1), and is information for responding to CU3 that the gaming machine has executed the lending of the game medium. is.

In this embodiment, the system is designed so that the minimum necessary information is transmitted and received in the communication between the CU3 and the frame control board 17B. Therefore, in the above example, the CU3 does not send a response to the frame control board 17B in response to the notification from the frame control board 17B to the CU3. That is, the CU3 does not respond to the gaming machine installation information external notification to the frame control board 17B, the CU3 does not respond to the gaming machine information external notification to the frame control board 17B, and the CU3 to the counting information external notification does not perform frame control. No response is made to the board 17B. However, in response to the notification from CU3 to the frame control board 17B, as an exception, the frame control board 17B responds to CU3. The rental information external response to the rental information external notification corresponds to this.

In the communication between the CU3 and the frame control board 17B, the above-mentioned gaming machine installation information external notification, gaming machine information external notification, counting information external notification, lending information external notification, and lending information external response are all common asynchronous serial communications. It can be realized by asynchronous serial communication through ports.

Note that this is not necessarily the case, and communication may be performed using separate communication ports. For example, a first asynchronous serial communication port is configured as a communication port for rental information, and a second asynchronous serial communication port is configured as a common communication port for gaming machine information and counting information. Then, through the first serial communication port, lending information external notification and lending information external response are performed, and through the second serial communication port, gaming machine installation information external notification, gaming machine information external notification, and counting information external notification are performed. You can do it.

In addition, for example, the first asynchronous serial communication port is configured as a common communication port for rental information and counting information, and the second asynchronous serial communication port is configured as a communication port for game machine information. . Then, the lending information external notification, the lending information external response, and the counting information external notification are performed through the first serial communication port, and the gaming machine installation information external notification and the gaming machine information external notification are carried out through the second serial communication port. You can do it.

FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the principle of inter-game-machine-CU electronic message data transmission between the gaming machine and CU3 in this embodiment, showing a timing chart corresponding to transmission pattern A as a transmission pattern. is.

At the top, "ON/OFF" of the lending operation is shown with the horizontal axis as the time axis. Below the time axis indicating "ON/OFF" of the lending operation, the left side is the frame control board 17B, the right side is the CU3, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. It shows the timing of transmission.

At the top is shown the gaming machine information external notification sent from the frame control board 17B to the CU3. In this embodiment, the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information external notice is assumed to be 300 [ms]. Incidentally, before the gaming machine information external notification is performed, the gaming machine installation information external notification is executed from the frame control board 17B to the CU3, but this is omitted from the drawing.

After issuing the gaming machine installation information external notification, the frame control board 17B issues the gaming machine information external notification to the CU3 for the first time. The frame control board 17B sends the first count information external notification to the CU3 at the timing when 100 [ms] have passed since the timing of the start of the gaming machine information external notification, that is, the timing of the start of the transmission of the gaming machine information external notification data. I do.

The counting information notified by the counting information external notification includes the counting execution information and the counting preparation information, as described above. If the counting operation is not detected within the transmission cycle (300 [ms]) of the gaming machine information external notification, the frame control board 17B sets the counting information as the counting preparation information (number of game media to be counted=0). Information external notification is performed to notify the CU3 that the gaming machine is in a counting preparation state.

On the other hand, when the counting operation is detected within the transmission cycle (300 [ms]) of the game machine information external notification, the frame control board 17B counts the counting information as counting execution information (number of game media to be counted=α). Information external notification is performed to notify the execution of counting and the number of unit counting game media α to the CU3. Thereafter, the same operation is repeated with a transmission period of 300 [ms].

When the CU3 detects the lending operation, the CU3 enables transmission within a first specified time (for example, 150 [ms]) from completion of reception of the latest (most recent) count information external notification transmitted from the frame control board 17B. In order to complete the transmission within this valid transmission time, the lending information is externally notified to the frame control board 17B, with the lending information as the lending execution information (the number of lending game media = β) to execute the lending and The frame control board 17B is notified of the number of lent game media per unit β.

In this case, the frame control board 17B, which has received the lending information external notification, sends the lending receipt result to CU3 within a second specified time (for example, 10 [ms]) from the completion of receiving the lending information external notification. (For example, receipt result=1).

Here, when a game is played on a gaming machine, in addition to the above-mentioned rental game, the game medium owned by the player in association with the card (membership card/visitor card) (in the case of a managed pachinko machine) A game (hereinafter referred to as "replay game with points") in which the points (scores) corresponding to the number of balls (balls/medals held in the managed slot machine) are converted into game points (game points), Savings points (savings points), which are the points corresponding to the game storage media owned by the player in association with the membership card (balls saved for managed pachinko machines/medals saved for managed slot machines), are converted into game points (game points). It is possible to play a game (hereinafter referred to as "saving point replay game") by converting.

In this embodiment, the operation for performing the points replay game is referred to as the "scores replay operation", and the operation for performing the savings points replay game is referred to as the "savings points replay operation". For example, the point replay operation is performed by touching the payout button icon (for example, the payout icon in FIG. 79) displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500, and the savings point replay operation is performed by The replay button icon (for example, the replay icon in FIG. 79) displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 can be touched. Even when such a replay operation for points or a replay operation for saved points is performed, the CU 3 notifies the frame control board 17B of the lending information externally, similarly to the above-described lending operation. The lending information external response is sent from the control board 17B to the CU3.

FIG. 72 shows data transmission between the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B in this embodiment, data transmission between the frame control board 17B and CU3, and data transmission between CU3 and an external device. , is a timing chart for explaining.
In this figure, the horizontal axis is the time axis, the uppermost stage shows the internal notification of gaming machine information from the main control board 16 to the frame control board 17B, and the second stage shows the external notification of gaming machine information from the frame control board 17B to the CU3. , and the bottom row shows the external device notification from the CU3 to the external device.

As described above, the transmission period of the gaming machine information internal notification from the main control board 16 to the frame control board 17B is 100 [ms], and the transmission period of the gaming machine information external notification from the frame control board 17B to the CU3 is 300 [ms]. [ms]. For this reason, in this embodiment, the frame control board 17B aggregates the gaming machine information contained in the gaming machine information internal notifications sent from the main control board 16 for up to three times, Generate gaming machine aggregate information for external notification of gaming machine information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72, the frame control board 17B, at the timing when the reception of the gaming machine information internal notification transmitted from the main control board 16 is completed, the game machine information for the latest three times including the gaming machine information internal notification. A first tallying process is performed for tallying the gaming machine information included in the information internal notification. Then, information aggregated in the first aggregation process is stored in the data unit X as gaming machine aggregate information to generate gaming machine information external notification data, and the generated gaming machine information external notification data is transmitted to CU3 as gaming machine information external notification. do.

Here, the gaming machine information included in the gaming machine information internal notification transmitted from the main control board 16 is stored by a first-in, first-out (FIFO) method using, for example, a transmission queue (hereinafter referred to as a "transmission queue"). - The configuration may be such that retrieval is performed, and the first totalization process is performed.

Next, CU3 notifies the external device of the external device. As described in the second embodiment and the like, the external devices include the call lamp 1000, the relay device 1200, the management computer 900, etc., and the CU3 communicates with the external devices via the serial communication unit 334. Communicate with

The external device notification is a notification from the CU3 to the external device including information for the external device corresponding to the external transmission data described in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, etc., the transmission cycle of the external device notification was set to 200 [ms], but in this embodiment, the transmission cycle of the external device notification is set to It is assumed that the transmission cycle is 300 [ms].

As described in the second embodiment and the like, the CU3, at the timing when the reception of the gaming machine information external notification transmitted from the frame control board 17B is completed, transmits the gaming machine information included in the gaming machine information external notification. A second tabulation process of tabulating is performed. Then, based on the aggregation result of the second aggregation process, external transmission data is generated by storing normal information and recovery information (normal information + recovery information) in the data part, and the generated external transmission data is used as an external device notification. Send to an external device.

Here, at the timing when the frame control board 17B completes the reception of the gaming machine information internal notification transmitted from the main control board 16, the latest three gaming machine information internal notifications including the gaming machine information internal notification are received. Although the first tallying process for tallying the gaming machine information included is performed, this is merely an example. For example, the timing of performing the first tallying process does not necessarily have to be the timing at which the reception of the gaming machine information internal notification is completed, and may be timing of any cycle that is not synchronized with the gaming machine information internal notification. In this case, the frame control board 17B may perform the first tallying process of tallying the gaming machine information for two or three times stored in the transmission queue at the timing of this arbitrary cycle.

[6-5. Data structure of CU]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of data stored in the CU storage unit 3231 in this embodiment.
The CU storage unit 3231 stores a second CU processing program 3241 that is read by the CU control unit 323 and executed as the second CU processing. The second CU processing program 3241 includes a game model registration program 3242 executed as a game model registration process, and various processing programs 3243 selectively executed according to the game model registered in the game model registration process.

The various processing programs 3243 include, for example, a plurality of lending processing programs for enabling the above-described lending game, a plurality of replay processing programs for replaying points for enabling the above-described replaying games with replaying points, the above-described saving A plurality of saved point replay processing programs for enabling a point replay game, a plurality of display settings such as a display screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 and information to be displayed on each display screen. A plurality of processing programs corresponding to various processing such as a liquid crystal unit display setting program are stored. Each of these processing programs includes a plurality of processing programs executed as subroutine processing corresponding to each gaming machine.

In addition, the CU storage unit 323 stores a game model identification table 3244, a game model registration table 3245, a processing setting table 3246, a unit setting registration data 3248, a game information management table 3234, and external transmission data. A management table 3235, a machine number 3237, a game machine database 3238, and a game information accumulation database 3239 are stored.

The game-model identification table 3244 is a table used to specify the corresponding game-model type of the managed gaming machine. A main chip ID corresponding to a slot machine (management slot machine) of the gaming machine is stored in an identifiable manner.

The game machine registration table 3245 is a table used for registering the game machine of the game machine in the CU3, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the game machine registration table 3245, game machine classifications, setting Nos, which are setting numbers, and registration information (sender) are defined in association with each other.

The gaming machine category is a category of gaming machines provided correspondingly. In this embodiment, management gaming machines are defined as gaming machine classifications.

The setting No. is a setting number indicating which game type is to be registered based on which registration information transmitted from which transmission source.

The registration information (transmission source) is the information (registration information) for registering the gaming machine type and the transmission source device of the registration information. The registration information includes registration information for each game machine category and game model of the game machine, information for registration of the model name of the game machine, and information for registration of the lending rate of the game machine. .

A specific description will be given.
(1) Setting No. "M1"
“Game machine installation information (management game machine)” is defined in the registration information for each game machine category/game model. The gaming machine installation information is, for example, information including information (chip ID information) such as the above-described main chip ID. This means that the gaming machine classification/game model is registered based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the management gaming machine installed correspondingly.
"Game machine installation information (management game machine) + model setting information (information distribution server)" is defined in the model name registration information. This is to register the model name based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the management gaming machine installed correspondingly and the model setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901 which is a kind of management device. means.
"Rate information (ball management server)" is defined in the lending rate registration information. This means that the lending rate is registered based on the rate information transmitted from the ball-handling management server 902, which is a type of management device.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that this setting "M1" is applied.
When the CU control unit 323 receives the gaming machine installation information including the main chip ID as the chip ID information from the corresponding management gaming machine, it refers to the game model identification table 3244 to determine which type ( Based on whether the main chip ID corresponds to a pachinko machine/slot machine), the game type classification of the corresponding management game machine is specified. Then, along with the corresponding game machine classification "management game machine" of the unit setting registration data 3248, the identified game machine is stored and registered for each corresponding game machine.

The information distribution server 901 also stores a model identification table that defines setting information of a model (model name) in association with a main chip ID as identification information of each managed gaming machine. Therefore, the CU control unit 323 transmits a model setting information request notification command including the main chip ID transmitted from the corresponding managed gaming machine to the information distribution server 901 . When the information distribution server 901 receives the model setting information request notification command, it refers to the model identification table, specifies the model setting information corresponding to the main chip ID included in the model setting information request notification command, and transmits it to the CU3. Then, based on the model setting information received from the information distribution server 901, the CU control unit 323 stores and registers the model name of the corresponding management gaming machine in the corresponding gaming machine model name of the unit setting registration data 3248.

It should be noted that, instead of doing as described above, a model identification table may be distributed from a management device such as the information distribution server 901 to the CU 3 in advance, and the model identification table may be stored in the CU storage unit 3231. good. In this case, when the CU control unit 323 is connected to the management gaming machine and receives the gaming machine installation information, the CU control unit 323 refers to the model identification table stored in the CU storage unit 3231 to determine the main unit included in the gaming machine installation information. The model name may be registered based on the model setting information corresponding to the chip ID.

(2) Setting No. "M2"
"Game machine setting information (information distribution server)" is defined in the registration information for each game machine category/game model. This game machine setting information is, for example, setting information for each game machine classification and game model of each management game machine installed in the store, and is information set by the management device side such as the information distribution server 901 . This means that the game machine category and game model are registered based on the game machine setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901, which is a kind of management device.
"Model setting information (information delivery server)" is defined in the model name registration information. This model setting information is, for example, setting information of the model name of each management game machine installed in the store, and is information set by the management device such as the information distribution server 901 . This means that the model name is registered based on the model setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901 .
"Rate information (ball management server)" is defined in the lending rate registration information. This means that the lending rate is registered based on the rate information transmitted from the ball-handling management server 902, which is a type of management device.

When this setting “M2” is applied, the information distribution server 901, for example, for each game island on which a managed game machine of each model name is installed, for each CU3 corresponding to the game island, a game machine Send setting information and model setting information. Then, based on the gaming machine setting information and model setting information received from the information distribution server 901, the CU control unit 323 sets the classification, type, and model name of the corresponding management gaming machine to the corresponding gaming machine classification of the unit setting registration data 3248. , corresponding game machine type and corresponding game machine model name. Also, based on the rate information transmitted from the ball management server 901, the CU control unit 323 stores and registers the lending rate of the corresponding managed gaming machine in the corresponding gaming machine lending rate of the unit setting registration data 3248.
Note that the gaming machine setting information and the model setting information may be transmitted by a management device such as the hall server 801 instead of the information distribution server 901 .

(3) Setting No. "M3"
In the registration information for each game machine classification/game model, "boarding setting information (ball management server)" is defined. For example, for each management gaming machine installed in a store, the setting information is stored between gaming machines with different gaming machine classifications, gaming models, and lending rates, using stored gaming media owned by the player and gaming media owned by the player. This is setting information regarding so-called boarding for enabling games. This means that the gaming machine classification/game model is registered based on the entry setting information transmitted from the ball management server 902, which is a type of management device.
"Model setting information (information delivery server)" is defined in the model name registration information. This means that the model name is registered based on the model setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901 .
The information for registration of the lending rate includes "boarding setting information (ball management server)". This means that the lending rate is registered based on the entry setting information transmitted from the ball management server 902 .

When this setting "M3" is applied, the ball-handling management server 902 sets each area (details will be described later) determined according to the game machine classification of the game machine, the game model, and the lending rate. In addition to the entry target area information, entry setting information including game machine classification, game model type and rate information is transmitted to each of the corresponding CUs 3 . Based on the entry setting information received from the information distribution server 901, the CU control unit 323 sets the classification, type, and lending rate of the corresponding gaming machine to the corresponding gaming machine classification, the corresponding gaming machine type, and Each of them is stored and registered in the corresponding gaming machine lending rate. Also, the CU control unit 323 stores and registers the model name of the corresponding gaming machine in the corresponding gaming machine model name of the unit setting registration data 3248 based on the model setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901 . Note that the machine type information may also be set and managed on the side of the ball management server 902, and the machine type setting information may be included in the boarding setting information and transmitted to the CU3.

Which of the above registration information settings is to be applied may be freely changed by the store according to the design/specification of the gaming machine, the operation of the store, and the like. In this case, it is possible to change the setting by operating the CU3 on the store side, or configure a switch such as a DIP switch for changing the setting in the CU3, and change the setting by switching this switch. It should be possible to make changes.

The processing setting table 3246 is a table used for selecting and setting processing corresponding to the game machine type registered in the game machine machine registration process, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the process setting table 3246, process types, game machine classifications/game model types, and process settings are defined in association with each other.

The processing type defines a processing type corresponding to each type of processing program stored in the various processing programs 3243 of the CU storage unit 3231 .
Pachinko machines to be managed and slot machines to be managed are determined for each processing type by gaming machine category/game model.
In the process setting, the name of the process selected and set as the process of the process type is defined for each process type.

A specific description will be given.
(1) Processing type “Lending processing”
For the "managed pachinko machine", the processing setting "rental processing A (ball lending processing)" is defined. Then, for the lending rate of "4 yen", "lending processing A-1 (for 4 yen ball lending processing)" of the lending processing A is determined, and for the lending rate of "1 yen", of the lending processing A, "Lending process A-2 (for 1 yen ball lending process)" is defined.
Lending process A-1 (for 4 yen ball lending process) is a lending process with a lending rate of 4 yen for a managed pachinko machine, and the number of unit lending game media β is set to 125 balls (for 500 yen). is a process of lending out pachinko balls.
Lending process A-2 (for 1 yen ball lending process) is a lending process with a lending rate of 1 yen for a pachinko machine under management, where the number of unit lending game media β is set to "200 balls (for 200 yen)" is a process of lending out pachinko balls.

For the "management slot machine", the processing setting "lending process B (medal lending process)" is defined. Then, for the lending rate of "20 yen", "lending processing B-1 (for 20 yen medal lending processing)" of the lending processing B is determined, and for the lending rate of "5 yen", out of the lending processing B "Lending process B-2 (for 5 yen medal lending process)" is defined.
Lending process B-1 (for 20-yen medal lending process) is a lending process in which the lending rate for the managed slot machine is set at 20 yen. ” is the process of lending the medals.
Lending process B-2 (for 5 yen medal lending process) is a lending process with a lending rate of 5 yen for the managed slot machine, and the number of unit lending game media β is set to 200 (for 1000 yen). ” is the process of lending the medals.

(2) Processing type "Position replay processing"
For the "managed pachinko machine", the processing setting "replay processing A (replay processing with balls)" is defined. Then, for the lending rate of "4 yen", the "point replay processing A-1 (for holding ball replay processing of 4 yen)" of the point replay processing A is determined, and the lending rate is "1 yen". , "replay process A-2 (for 1 yen replay process)" of the replay process A is defined.
Point replay processing A-1 (for 4 yen ball replay processing) is a point replay processing in which the lending rate is 4 yen for the managed pachinko machine, and the number of unit replay game media is This is a process of setting the number to "125 balls (500 yen worth)".
Point replay processing A-2 (for 1 yen replay processing for owned balls) is a point replay processing in which the lending rate is 1 yen for the managed pachinko machine, and the number of unit replay gaming media is This is a process for setting the number to "200 balls (worth 200 yen)".

For the "management slot machine", the processing setting "replay processing B (replay processing with medals)" is defined. Then, for the loan rate of "20 yen", "replay processing B-1 (for replay processing with medals of 20 yen)" of the replay processing B is determined, and the loan rate is "5 yen". , "replay process B-2 (for 5 yen replay process with medals)" of the replay process B is defined.
The point replay process B-1 (for the 20-yen possessed medal replay process) is a point replay process in which the lending rate is 20 yen for the managed slot machine, and the number of unit replay game media is converted into a unit replay medal. This is a process for setting the number to "50 sheets (1000 yen worth)".
The point replay process A-2 (for 5-yen possessed medal replay process) is a point replay process in which the lending rate is 5 yen for the managed slot machine, and the number of unit replay game media is used as a unit replay medal. This is a process for setting the number to "200 sheets (1000 yen worth)".

Although illustration is omitted, in the processing setting table 3246, in addition to the lending processing and the score replay processing, various types of processing such as the above-described savings point replay processing and liquid crystal unit display setting processing are similarly performed. The processing settings are defined in the form of

On the CU3 side, the total data storage area in the RAM of the CU storage unit 3231 stores the number of game balls (the number of game medals for slot machines), the number of card holding balls (the number of card holding medals for slot machines), the number of stored balls (for slot machines (Number of medals saved), remaining amount, etc. are stored.

In the lending process, the CU control unit 323 notifies the lending information externally to the frame control board 17B in response to detection of the lending operation. Then, the CU control unit 323 subtracts the balance corresponding to the unit number of lent game media (unit number of lent balls/unit number of lent medals) from the balance in response to receiving the lending information external response from the frame control board 17B. , to update the balance.

Further, in the replay processing, the CU control unit 323 notifies the above-described lending information externally to the frame control board 17B in response to detection of the replay operation. Then, in response to receiving the loan information external response from the frame control board 17B, the CU control unit 323 converts the number of game media on the card (number of balls on the card/number of medals on the card) to the number of unit replay game media (unit replay). The number of play balls/the number of unit replay medals) is subtracted to update the number of card holding game media.

Further, in the savings points replay process, the CU control unit 323 notifies the frame control board 17B of the above-described lending information externally in response to detection of the savings points replay operation. Then, in response to receiving the lending information external response from the frame control board 17B, the CU control unit 323 converts the number of stored game media (number of stored balls/number of stored medals) to the number of unit replay game media (number of unit replay balls/number of stored medals). (number of unit replay medals) is subtracted to update the number of stored game media.

Unit setting registration data 3248 is data in which various setting registration contents in CU3 are stored, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
The unit setting registration data 3248 includes, for example, a unit ID, a game model registration setting number, a compatible game machine category, a compatible game model type, a compatible game machine model name, a compatible game machine lending rate, and a lending process. , a point replay process, a savings point replay process, and a liquid crystal unit display setting process are stored.

The unit ID stores an ID as identification information of the own unit.
In the game model registration setting No., a setting number corresponding to the setting for game model registration set based on the game model registration table 3245 of FIG. 74 is stored.

The game machine classification of the corresponding game machine is stored and registered in the corresponding game machine classification based on the setting corresponding to the game machine registration setting number.
For each compatible game machine, based on the setting corresponding to the game model registration setting number, the corresponding game machine model is stored and registered.
In the compatible game machine model name, the model name of the corresponding game machine is stored and registered based on the setting corresponding to the game model registration setting number.
In the corresponding gaming machine lending rate, the lending rate of the corresponding gaming machine is stored and registered based on the setting corresponding to the gaming machine registration setting number.

In the lending process, processing settings of the lending process corresponding to the registered game machine are stored.
In the point replay process, processing settings of the point replay process corresponding to the registered game machine are stored.
In the savings point replay process, processing settings for the savings point replay process corresponding to the registered gaming machine are stored.
In the liquid crystal unit display setting process, processing settings of the liquid crystal unit display setting process corresponding to the registered gaming machine are stored.

[6-6. process]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the second CU process executed by the CU control unit 323 of CU3 according to the second CU process program 3241 stored in the CU storage unit 3231 in this embodiment.

First, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not data (game machine CU-to-CU electronic message data) has been received from the frame control board 17B (M1). If it is determined that the command has been received (M1: Yes), the CU control unit 323 executes command determination processing (M3). Specifically, the command stored in the command portion of the received data is determined. Then, the CU control unit 323 determines the information type of the received data based on the command determination result of M3 (M5).

If it is determined that the information type is gaming machine installation information (M5: gaming machine installation information), the CU control unit 323 executes gaming machine registration processing (M7).

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of game model registration processing.
First, the CU control unit 323 registers the gaming machine type based on the gaming machine installation information (main chip ID) received from the management gaming machine (N1). The registration method of this gaming machine is as described above.

Next, the CU control unit 323 sets execution of various processes (N3). Specifically, with reference to the processing setting table 3246 stored in the CU storage unit 3231, various processing such as lending processing, score replay processing, savings point replay processing, liquid crystal unit display setting processing, etc. , determine the processing settings corresponding to the game machine registered in N1, and store them in the lending processing, score replay processing, savings point replay processing, liquid crystal unit display setting processing, etc. of the unit setting registration data 3248.

Next, the CU control unit 323 performs control to transmit a command corresponding to the display setting of the liquid crystal unit 500 set in the liquid crystal unit display setting process in N3 to the command transmitting/receiving unit 506 of the liquid crystal unit 500 via the command transmitting/receiving unit 335. (N5). The liquid crystal unit 500 can display various information related to games on the corresponding managed gaming machines based on commands sent from the CU 3 and content data delivered from the information delivery server 901 . Then, the CU control unit 323 terminates the game machine registration process.

Returning to FIG. 77, after executing the game machine registration process, the CU control unit 323 starts executing various processes set in N3 (M9).

If it is determined in M5 that the information type is gaming machine information (M5: gaming machine information), the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not it is the external device notification timing (M11). Then, if it is determined that it is the external device notification timing (M11; Yes), the external device notification process is executed (M13). Specifically, a second aggregation process for aggregating the received gaming machine information is performed to generate external transmission data, and an external device notification is sent to transmit the generated external transmission data to the external device via the serial communication unit 334. conduct.

If it is determined in M5 that the information type is counting information (M5: counting information), the CU control unit 323 determines the type of counting information (M15). Then, if it is determined that the type of the counting information is the counting execution information (M15; counting execution information), the CU control section 323 determines whether or not the card holding game is played based on the unit count game media count α included in the counting execution information. The number of media (number of balls held on card/number of medals held on card) is updated (M17).

After M17, or if it is determined at M15 that the type of the counting information is the counting preparation information (M15; counting preparation information), the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the lending flag is "ON". (M19). The lending flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when a lending operation is detected. If it is determined that the lending flag is "ON" (M19: Yes), the timer is activated (started) (M21).

If it is determined in M5 that the information type is the lending receipt result (M5: lending receipt result), the CU control unit 323 sets the lending flag to "OFF" (M23).

After M9, M13, M21 or M23, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the lending flag is "ON" (M25), and if it is determined to be "ON" (M25; Yes), It is determined whether or not it is the lending information external notification timing (M27).

If it is determined that it is the rental information external notification timing (M27: Yes), the CU control unit 323 performs rental information external notification (M29). Specifically, the CU control unit 323 notifies the lending information externally that the number of unit lent game media β corresponding to the processing settings of the N3 lending processing, the points replay processing, and the savings points replay processing is stored in the data unit X. Data is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 17B of the corresponding gaming machine. Then, the CU control unit 323 stops (resets) the operating timer (M31).

If it is determined in M25 that the lending flag is not "ON" (M25: No), the CU control unit 323 detects any one of the lending operation, the point replay operation, and the savings point replay operation. is determined (M33). Then, if it is determined that it has been detected (M33; Yes), the lending flag is set to "ON" (M35).

After M31 or M35, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not to end the processing (M39). If it is determined to continue the process (M39: No), the CU control unit 323 returns the process to M1. Also, if it is determined that the process is to end (M39: Yes), the CU control unit 323 ends the second CU process.

In steps M23 to M35 of the above processing, the illustration and explanation focused on the case where the lending operation was performed. Similarly, the CU control unit 323 may notify the frame control board 17B of the lending information externally.

[6-7. LCD unit display screen]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display (touch panel) 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 in this embodiment.

FIG. 79(1) shows an example of the display screen when the gaming machine category/game model is managed pachinko machines, and FIG. An example of a display screen in one case is shown.

Similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 79(1) and (2) show the player's avatar image and menus displaying items that can be selected by the player or the like by operating the player or the like. A leave button for switching the screen of the liquid crystal display 504 to a screen indicating that the player is away from the seat when operated by the player or the like, and a button for returning the card inserted in the CU3 by the operation of the player or the like. A return button or the like for returning the item to CU3 is displayed.

The display screen of FIG. 79(1) and the display screen of FIG. 79(2) are characterized in that the display corresponding to the game model of the gaming machine is made. A specific description will be given.

The display screen of FIG. 79(1) is a display screen corresponding to the managed pachinko machine.
For this reason, the number of big wins, the number of small wins, the number of probability variations, and the number of starts are displayed as game history information, and the probability of big wins is displayed as spec information of the corresponding gaming machine.
In addition, the number of balls held on the day (number of balls held) is displayed as the number of game media possessed by the player, the number of stored balls is displayed as the number of game media stored by the player, and the number of game media that the player can use in the game is displayed. The number of balls is displayed. As a unit of the number of game media, "balls" corresponding to the pachinko balls of the game media are displayed.
In addition, a ball rental icon is displayed as an icon for playing a rented game, a payout icon is displayed as an icon for playing a point replay game, and a replay icon is displayed as an icon for playing a savings point replay game. It is

Here, as the icon for replaying points, a payout icon indicated by the characters "payout" is displayed so that the player can easily understand it. You may make it display the icon shown with characters, such as a ball replay.
The same applies to the icon for replaying the savings points.

The display screen of FIG. 79(2) is a display screen corresponding to the management slot machine.
For this reason, the number of big bonuses (BB), the number of regular bonuses (RB), the number of assist replay times (ART), and the number of games are displayed as game history information, and bonuses such as BB and RB are displayed as spec information of the corresponding gaming machines. The combined probability of ART is displayed.
In addition, the number of medals held on the day (number of medals possessed) is displayed as the number of game media possessed by the player, the number of stored medals is displayed as the number of game media stored by the player, and the number of game media that the player can use in the game is displayed. The number of game medals is displayed. As the unit of the number of these game media, "pieces" corresponding to the medals of the game media are displayed.
In addition, a loan medal icon is displayed as an icon for playing a game for rent, a payout icon is displayed as an icon for playing a replay game with points, and a replay icon is displayed as an icon for playing a replay game with points. It is

As in FIG. 79(1), in FIG. 79(2) as well, a payout icon indicated by the characters "payout" is displayed as an icon for replaying points so that the player can easily understand. Instead of this, an icon indicated by characters such as "replay points" or "replay holding medals" may be displayed.
The same applies to the icon for replaying the savings points.

Also, in the display screens of FIGS. 79(1) and 79(2), for example, the model name of the corresponding gaming machine may be displayed on the right side of the display of the machine number (XXXX series) at the top. can. In this case, based on the command transmitted from CU3 and the content data transmitted from information distribution server 901, the model name of the corresponding managed pachinko machine is displayed on the display screen of FIG. On the display screen of 2), the model name of the corresponding management slot machine can be displayed.

In addition, on the display screen of FIG. 79(1), the number of balls held on the day (number of balls held), the number of stored balls, the number of game balls, etc., and the unit "balls" are displayed in association with the managed pachinko machine. On the display screen of FIG. 79(2), the number of medals held on the day (number of medals held), the number of stored medals, the number of game medals, etc., and their units, corresponding to the management slot machine, are displayed. ' is displayed, but instead of these displays, points such as points, savings points, game points, etc., and their units, ``points'' and ``points'', are displayed. good too.

As described above, in the current gaming machines, the pachinko machine uses a game device dedicated to the pachinko machine, and the slot machine uses a game device dedicated to the slot machine. For this reason, current gaming devices such as card units can only display information corresponding to the corresponding gaming machine type (pachinko machine/slot machine).

On the other hand, the CU 3 of the present embodiment can display the display screen corresponding to the managed gaming machine type on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 after registering the type of the corresponding managed gaming machine.

[6-8. Another example of communication between managed gaming machine and CU]
In FIG. 71, the principle of inter-game-machine-CU electronic message data transmission between the managed gaming machine and CU3 was explained using a timing chart. It is also possible to apply patterns.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart for explaining transmission pattern B, which is another transmission pattern. The view of the timing chart is the same as the timing chart of FIG.
In this transmission pattern B, the external notification of gaming machine information and the external notification of counting information from the frame control board 17B to the CU3 are the same as in the transmission pattern A of FIG. What differs from the transmission pattern A is the lending information external notification and lending information external response.

When the CU3 detects the lending operation within the transmission cycle (300 [ms]) of the gaming machine information external notification, the CU3 waits a first specified time (for example, 150 [ ms]) is set as a valid transmission time, and the lending information is set as lending preparation information (the number of lendable game media=0) to the frame control board 17B so as to complete the transmission within this valid transmission time. An external notification is made to notify the frame control board 17B that the CU3 is ready for lending.

In this case, the frame control board 17B, which has received the lending information external notification, sends the lending receipt result to CU3 within a second specified time (for example, 10 [ms]) from the completion of receiving the lending information external notification. (For example, receipt result = 0) lending information external response is performed.

On the other hand, when the CU3 detects the lending operation within the transmission cycle (300 [ms]) of the gaming machine information external notification, the CU3 detects the first specified time (for example, 150 [ms]) is set as a transmission valid time, and the lending information is set to the frame control board 17B as lending execution information (the number of lending game media=β) so as to complete the transmission within this transmission valid time. The lending information external notification is performed to notify the frame control board 17B of the execution of lending and the number of unit lending game media β.

In this case, the frame control board 17B, which has received the lending information external notification, sends the lending receipt result to CU3 within a second specified time (for example, 10 [ms]) from the completion of receiving the lending information external notification. (For example, receipt result=1).

[6-9. Action effect]
According to this embodiment, a CU3 (card unit 3), which is a kind of gaming device, is provided corresponding to a management gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine.
CU3 can be used in common for different types of managed gaming machines (managed pachinko machines, managed slot machines), and based on external information transmitted from corresponding managed gaming machines, management devices, etc. Register the type of managed gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately register the type of corresponding gaming machine.

The CU3 also registers the type of the corresponding managed gaming machine, using the gaming machine installation information (chip ID information, etc.) transmitted from the managed gaming machine as external information. According to this, based on the information transmitted from the managed gaming machine, the type of the corresponding managed gaming machine can be easily and appropriately registered.

The CU3 also registers the types of corresponding managed gaming machines using setting information (game machine setting information, etc.) transmitted from various management devices as external information. According to this, based on the information transmitted from the management device, it is possible to easily and appropriately register the type of corresponding management gaming machine.

In addition, CU3 performs game enablement processing for enabling a game to be played on a managed gaming machine, such as lending processing, point replay processing, savings point replay processing, lending information external notification processing, liquid crystal unit display setting processing, and the like. can be executed, and different game enabling processes can be executed according to the type of gaming machine to be registered. According to this, it is possible to execute appropriate game enabling processing according to the type of gaming machine to be registered.

[7. Sixth embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a sixth embodiment, which is an embodiment in which the CU3 realizes entry between different types of gaming machines and loan rates in the fifth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, gaming machines include managed gaming machines and unmanaged gaming machines.

Current gaming devices such as card units and token lending machines do not have a function that enables the transfer of accumulated balls and tokens between a ball account and a medal account. It does not support the entry of medals.

In this way, since it does not correspond to the entry of accumulated balls and medals, the information on entry notified from the management device such as the ball management server to the above-mentioned gaming device includes the type of game machine, pachinko machine / slot machine. does not contain information about For this reason, in the current gaming device, display screens such as a boarding area selection screen for allowing the player to select a boarding area and a boarding game screen to be displayed during boarding games are provided corresponding to pachinko machines. In the game device, "ball" is fixedly displayed as the unit of game media, and in the game device provided corresponding to the slot machine, "sheets" is fixedly displayed as the unit of game medium.

However, as described in the fifth embodiment, based on the gaming machine installation information (chip ID information, etc.) transmitted from the management gaming machine, gaming machine setting information, model setting information, etc. transmitted from the management device, A game device provided corresponding to a game machine can execute a process corresponding to the game model after registering the game model of the corresponding game machine. For this reason, it is conceivable that the card unit can be adapted to accommodate the entry of stored balls and tokens.
This embodiment is an embodiment for realizing the entry of the stored balls/medals.

[7-1. Data configuration of ball management server]
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of data stored in the storage unit 9021 included in the ball-handling management server 902 in this embodiment.
In the storage unit 9021 of the ball management server 902, there are a processing program 9022, a stored game medium number management table 9023, a game medium number management table 9024, a target area setting table 9025, and a CU management table 9027. remembered.

The stored game media number management table 9023 is a table used for managing the number of stored game media associated with the membership card owned by the player, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The stored game medium number management table 9023 contains a membership card ID that is identification information of a membership card, a membership number that is identification information of a member player who owns the membership card, and a game storage associated with the membership card. The number of media (the number of stored balls/the number of stored medals) is associated with and stored. The number of stored game media includes the number of stored balls and the number of stored medals, and the number of stored game media of the corresponding type is stored for each area determined based on the game model.

In this embodiment, areas are defined as follows.
Area 1: Unmanaged gaming machines (P) (machine classification: unmanaged gaming machines, by game model: pachinko machines), rental rate 4 yen Area 2: Unmanaged gaming machines (P) (machine classification: unmanaged gaming machine, by game model: pachinko machine), lending rate 1 yen Area 3: unmanaged gaming machine (S) (machine classification: unmanaged gaming machine, by gaming machine: slot machine), lending rate 20 yen Area 4: non Managed gaming machines (S) (machine classification: non-managed gaming machines, by gaming machine type: slot machines), lending rate 5 yen Area 5: Managed gaming machines (P) (machine classification: managed gaming machines, by gaming machine type: Pachinko machine), lending rate of 4 yen Area 6: Managed gaming machine (P) (machine classification: managed gaming machine, by machine type: pachinko machine), lending rate of 1 yen Area 7: Managed gaming machine (S) (gaming machine Category: managed gaming machines, by gaming machine: slot machines), lending rate 20 yen Area 8: gaming machines managed (S) (machine classification: unmanaged gaming machines, by gaming machine: slot machines), lending rate 5 yen

The owned game medium number management table 9024 is a table used for managing the owned game medium number associated with the member card/visitor card owned by the player. Although illustration is omitted, this table contains member card ID/visitor card ID, which is identification information of the member card/visitor card, and the number of gaming media (number of balls/number of medals) associated with the card. and are stored in association with each other. The number of possessed game media includes the number of possessed balls and the number of possessed medals. Similar to the stored game medium number management table 9023, the number of possessed game media of the corresponding type is stored for each area determined based on the game model. ing.

The number of game media managed by this number-of-game-mediums management table 9024 is managed as the number of game media owned only on the day, and in processing at the end of business (closing processing) after the end of the business, it corresponds to the membership card. The number of possessed game media is cleared to 0 after being updated to the number of stored game media corresponding to the membership card. In addition, the number of owned game media corresponding to the visitor card is all cleared to 0 in the processing at the end of business.

The entry target area setting table 9025 is a table in which entry is permitted/impossible from which area's gaming machine to which area's gaming machine, and an example of the configuration of the table is shown in FIG.
In the entry target area setting table 9025, it is associated with the entry source area (hereinafter referred to as the "entrance source area"), and whether or not it is possible to enter each of the entry destination areas (hereinafter referred to as the "entrance destination area"). (Access allowed: 〇, Access not allowed: ×) is stipulated. Whether it is possible to enter the vehicle in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 84 .

As shown in FIG. 84, according to the access target area setting table 9025 illustrated in FIG. Regarding the machine (S), it is possible to enter at a lending rate between 20 yen and 5 yen. Similarly, the managed gaming machine (P) is allowed to enter at a lending rate of between 4 yen and 1 yen, and the managed gaming machine (S) is allowed to enter at a lending rate of between 20 yen and 5 yen. ing. In other words, all gaming machines with the same gaming machine classification and the same gaming model type can be entered at different lending rates.

In addition, regardless of the lending rate, it is possible to enter between the unmanaged gaming machine (P) and the managed gaming machine (P). Boarding is allowed. In other words, gaming machines with the same gaming machine type can be entered into different gaming machine classifications and lending rates.

It is prohibited to enter between the non-managed game machine (P) and the non-managed game machine (S). On the other hand, entry between the managed gaming machine (P) and the managed gaming machine (S) is allowed.
In addition, entry between the unmanaged gaming machine (P) and the managed gaming machine (S) is prohibited, and entry between the unmanaged gaming machine (S) and the managed gaming machine (P) is also prohibited. there is

It should be noted that it is possible to arbitrarily change the setting of whether or not to allow entry between each area in the entry target area setting table 9025 according to the operation of the store or the like. In other words, the entry target area setting table 9025 may be configured as a rewritable table, and the propriety of entry between each area (entry allowed: ◯, entry not allowed: x) may be changed and updated and stored. .

The CU management table 9027 is a table used to manage each CU3. In addition, information such as the card ID of the card (member card/visitor card) currently accepted by the CU3 is stored.

[7-2. process]
FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of processing relating to boarding executed by the ball management server 902 and CU3 in this embodiment. The left side shows the processing of the ball management server 902, and the right side shows the processing of CU3.

First, the processing unit of the ball-handling management server 902 executes a boarding setting process (P1). Specifically, the entry target area is set according to the operation input of the manager of the store or the like. Then, the processing unit of the ball management server 902 executes a boarding target area setting table generation process for generating a boarding target area setting table 9025 based on the boarding target area set in P1 (P3).

The CU control unit 323 requests entry setting information from the ball management server 902 (Q1). Specifically, it transmits a boarding setting information request signal including the unit ID of its own unit. In response to this request for entry setting information, the processing unit of the ball management server 902 generates entry setting information based on the entry target area setting table 9025 generated in P3 and the CU management table 9027, and (P5).

The entry setting information includes, in addition to information about the entry target area defined in the entry target area setting table 9025 (hereinafter referred to as "entry target area information"), information corresponding to the CU3 specified from the CU management table 9027. It is possible to include information such as the classification of gaming machines (managed gaming machines/unmanaged gaming machines), the type of gaming machines (pachinko machines/slot machines), rate information (4 yen/1 yen/20 yen/5 yen), etc. can. The entry target area information is, for example, information on whether or not entry is possible from the entry source area when the area to which the gaming machine corresponding to the CU3 belongs is set as the entry destination area in the entry target area setting table 9025 (entry target area setting information in the column of the corresponding destination area in the table 9025).

Upon receiving the entry setting information from the ball management server 902, the CU control unit 323 executes the second game machine registration process based on the received entry setting information (Q3).

In the second game model registration process, the CU control unit 323 registers the game model in the same manner as in the game model registration process of FIG. 78 (Q5). Then, the CU control unit 323 sets execution of various processes (Q7). Further, the CU control section 323 performs control to transmit the set display settings of the liquid crystal unit 500 to the command transmission/reception section 506 of the liquid crystal unit 500 via the command transmission/reception section 335 (Q9). Then, the CU control unit 323 terminates the second game model registration process.

After executing the second game model registration process, for example, when the membership card is accepted in the CU3 and the player selects entry, the CU control unit 323 starts execution of the entry process (Q11). In the entry process, CU3 communicates with the ball possession management server 902, and the processing unit of the ball possession management server 902 starts executing the entry management process (P11).

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the entry process.
First, the CU control unit 323 selects the entry area according to the player's operation (R1). For example, the game machine classification/game model is displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500, and the player selects the game machine classification/game model from which the player enters.

Next, the CU control unit 323 executes a boarding availability determination process (R3). Specifically, based on the entry target area information included in the entry setting information acquired from the ball management server 902, the own unit corresponds to the area by gaming machine classification/game model selected in R1 (entry source area). It is determined whether or not it is possible to drive into the area (destination area).

If it is determined that entry is possible (R5; Yes), the CU control unit 323 executes entry-possible notification processing (R7). Specifically, a command is sent to the liquid crystal unit 500 to control the liquid crystal display 504 to display a message such as "Getting in is possible."

Next, the CU control unit 323 executes a boarding registration process (R9). In the boarding registration process, the CU control unit 323 inquires about the account corresponding to the accepted membership card for the gaming machine category/game model area selected in R1.

In response to the inquiry about the account from CU3, the processing unit of the ball management server 902 refers to the stored game medium number management table 9023, and sends information on the source account corresponding to the gaming machine classification/game model to CU3. Send to The information on the source account includes information on accounts in areas with different lending rates among the areas corresponding to the game machine classification/game model.

The CU control unit 323 displays the information about the entry source account received from the ball management server 902 on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500, and allows the player to select the entry source account.

Next, the CU control unit 323 applies the contents registered in the entry registration process of R9 to start the entry game process (R11).

After that, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not to end the entry game (R13), and if it determines to continue the entry game (R13; No), it waits as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined to end the entry game (R13; Yes), the entry process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in R5 that entry is not possible (R5; No), the CU control unit 323 executes entry impossibility notification processing (R15). Specifically, a command is sent to the liquid crystal unit 500 to control the liquid crystal display 504 to display a message such as "You cannot enter the vehicle." Then, the CU control unit 323 terminates the entry processing.

[7-3. LCD unit display screen]
87 to 89 are diagrams showing examples of display screens relating to entry displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 in this embodiment.
FIG. 87A shows an example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 provided corresponding to the managed pachinko machine with a loan rate of 4 yen.

On this display screen, "membership card" indicating that the membership card is being accepted is displayed at the top of the screen, and below that, the characters "managed pachinko machine", which is the classification and type of the gaming machine, and the lending conditions are displayed. "500 yen loan: 125 balls" is displayed. Underneath it, the characters "rental ball: 1 ball: 4 yen" indicating the loan rate, and the balance, owned balls, and accumulated balls associated with the membership card are displayed. Also, at the bottom of the screen, a "menu icon" for shifting to the menu screen is displayed. When the "menu icon" is touched, the display is switched to the menu screen of FIG. 87(B).

On the menu screen of FIG. 87(B), a "boarding icon", a "ball information icon", a "ball sharing icon", a "total number confirmation icon", and a "point icon" are displayed. there is When the "boarding icon" is touched, the display switches to the boarding processing screen shown in FIG. 87(C).

On the boarding process screen shown in FIG. 87(C), the words "boarding process in progress" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "Please wait for a while" is displayed at the center of the screen. After a certain period of time has passed since the display of the entry processing screen, the display is switched to the entry source area selection screen of FIG. 87(D).

On the boarding source area selection screen of FIG. 87(D), the characters "select boarding source area" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the "managed gaming machine icon" and "unmanaged gaming machine icon" are displayed at the center of the screen. It is The player touches the "managed gaming machine icon" when he wants to enter from the managed gaming machine, and touches the "unmanaged gaming machine icon" when he wants to enter from the unmanaged gaming machine.

FIG. 88(A) shows the entry source area selection screen same as FIG. 87(D), and shows a case where the "unmanaged gaming machine icon" is touched on the entry source area selection screen. When the "non-managed game machine icon" is touched and then the "determination icon" is touched, the display is switched to the boarding source area selection screen of FIG. 88(B).

On the boarding source area selection screen in FIG. 88(B), the characters "select boarding source area" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the "unmanaged pachinko machine icon" and "unmanaged slot machine icon" are displayed in the center of the screen. is displayed. If the player wants to enter from an unmanaged pachinko machine, touch the "unmanaged pachinko machine icon", and if the player wishes to enter from an unmanaged slot machine, touch the "unmanaged slot machine icon". do. This figure shows the case where the "unmanaged slot machine icon" is touched, and when the "determination icon" is touched after that, the boarding execution confirmation screen of FIG. 88(C) is displayed. Depending on the selection of the entry source area (R1 in FIG. 86), the entry availability determination process is executed (R3 in FIG. 86).

On the boarding execution confirmation screen of FIG. 88(C), the characters "boarding execution confirmation in progress" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "Please wait for a while" is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, after a certain period of time has elapsed, a boarding execution confirmation screen shown in FIG. 88(D) is displayed.

On the boarding execution confirmation screen shown in FIG. 88(D), the words "boarding execution confirmation" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "You cannot drive into a managed pachinko machine from an unmanaged slot machine." is displayed at the center of the screen. It is This is because, as described above, in this embodiment, entry from an unmanaged slot machine to a managed pachinko machine is not permitted, and it is determined that entry is not permitted in the entry permission/inhibition determination process (R3 in FIG. 86) ( R5 in FIG. 86; No→R15).

FIG. 89(A) shows the same boarding source area selection screen as FIG. 87(D), and shows a case where the "management game machine icon" is touched on this boarding source area selection screen. When the "management game machine icon" is touched and then the "determination icon" is touched, the display is switched to the boarding source area selection screen of FIG. 89(B).

On the boarding source area selection screen of FIG. 89(B), the characters "select boarding source area" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the "management pachinko machine icon" and "management slot machine icon" are displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The player touches the "managed pachinko machine icon" when he wants to enter from the managed pachinko machine, and touches the "managed slot machine icon" when he wants to enter from the managed slot machine. This figure shows the case where the "administration slot machine icon" is touched, and when the "determination icon" is touched after that, the boarding execution confirmation screen of FIG. 89(C) is displayed. Depending on the selection of the entry source area (R1 in FIG. 86), the entry availability determination process is executed (R3 in FIG. 86).

On the boarding execution confirmation screen of FIG. 89(C), the characters "boarding execution confirmation in progress" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "Please wait for a while" is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, after a certain period of time has passed, the boarding execution confirmation screen shown in FIG. 89(D) is displayed.

On the boarding execution confirmation screen in FIG. 89(D), the characters "boarding execution confirmation" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "boarding is possible. Please register for boarding." is displayed at the center of the screen. . This is because, as described above, in this embodiment, access from the managed slot machine to the managed pachinko machine is allowed, and it is determined in the access availability determination process (R3 in FIG. 86) that access is possible (see FIG. 86). R5 of 86; Yes→R7).

FIG. 90(A) shows a boarding registration screen displayed after the boarding execution confirmation screen of FIG. 89(D). Since the area of the managed slot machine is selected as the entry source area on this entry registration screen, the account of the managed slot machine (rental rate 20 yen) to be entered and the managed slot machine (rental rate 5 yen) account and are displayed. For each source account, the number of medals that can be converted into game points before entering and the number of balls that can be converted into game points after entering the managed pachinko machine (loan rate of 4 yen) are displayed. there is

Specifically, regarding the account of the managed slot machine (rental rate 20 yen), the number of medals that can be converted into game points before entering is "400", and the number of balls that can be converted into game points after entering is " "2000 balls" is displayed as "400 sheets→2000 balls". Similarly, regarding the account of the managed slot machine (loan rate of 5 yen), the number of medals that can be converted into game points before entry is "1200", and the number of balls that can be converted into game points after entry is "1500". "1200 pieces→1500 balls" is displayed as a display indicating that the number of coins is ".

In addition, an "ON/OFF icon" is displayed as an icon for switching the selection/non-selection of the deposit source for each deposit source account. When the ON/OFF icon is touched once, the icon display is switched from OFF to ON, and when touched again, the icon display is switched from ON to OFF.

FIG. 90(A) shows a case where the ON/OFF icon corresponding to the account of the managed slot machine (loan rate of 5 yen) is turned ON. The display switches to the boarding registration confirmation screen of 90(B).

On the boarding registration confirmation screen in FIG. 90(B), the characters "boarding registration confirmation" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "Do you want to register boarding?" is displayed at the center of the screen. When the "OK icon" is touched on this driving-in registration confirmation screen, the display is switched to the driving-in registration screen shown in FIG. 90(C).

On the boarding registration screen of FIG. 90(C), the characters "boarding registration in progress" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "Please wait for a while" is displayed at the center of the screen. After that, when a certain period of time elapses, the display switches to the boarding registration completion screen of FIG. 90(D).

On the boarding registration completion screen of FIG. 90(D), the characters "boarding registration completed" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the message "boarding registration completed" is displayed at the center of the screen. After displaying this entry registration completion screen, entry games can be played.

Although the case where the CU3 determines whether or not to allow entry is illustrated here, instead of this, the ball-handling management server 902 may determine whether or not to allow entry. That is, the CU3 transmits the starting area selected by the player to the ball management server 902 . Then, the ball-handling management server 902 performs a boarding availability determination process for determining whether or not it is possible to board the area (destination area) corresponding to the CU3 from the received boarding source area. The result may be sent to CU3.

[7-4. Action effect]
According to this embodiment, the CU control unit 323 of the CU3 is capable of executing the process of entering, and based on the entering setting information transmitted from the ball management server 902 capable of performing settings related to entering, different game It is possible to determine whether or not the machine can be entered by machine classification, by game machine type, and between lending rates. Then, the CU control unit 323 can perform a boarding-in game based on the determination result of boarding-in propriety.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to allow entry based on the entry setting information transmitted from the management device, and then to realize the entry game.

Also, the CU 3 can display various display screens regarding entry on the liquid crystal display 504 of the liquid crystal unit 500 . On these display screens, it is possible to perform display according to the game machine category, game model type, and lending rate of the corresponding game machine based on the entry setting information transmitted from the management device. Therefore, it is possible to correctly display the game machine type (managed game machine/non-managed game machine), game machine classification (pachinko machine/slot machine), and lending rate in the destination area, which is convenient for the player.

[8. Modifications of Fifth and Sixth Embodiments]
Embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above embodiments, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the scope of the present invention. Another embodiment will be described below. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[8-1. game machine]
In the above embodiments, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as the managed pachinko machine as the first managed gaming machine and the managed slot machine as the second managed gaming machine. However, in addition to these managed gaming machines, for example, as a managed gaming machine that performs a game using a game medium different from the pachinko balls used in the managed pachinko machine or the medals used in the managed slot machine, a third managed game machine It is also possible to envision a gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, it is a managed gaming machine in which games are played using game media other than pachinko balls and medals. A management game machine of an enclosed type (enclosed and circulating type) or a management game machine that performs a game based on a point system may be used as the third management game machine. This third managed gaming machine may also be included in the gaming machines according to the present invention, and gaming devices such as CU3 may register the types of the first to third managed gaming machines.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a display for enabling identification of the type of the corresponding managed gaming machine, the CU3 corresponding to the managed pachinko machine causes the liquid crystal unit 500 to display "ball", which is the unit of the pachinko balls. In the CU3 corresponding to the management slot machine, the unit of medals, ie, "pieces" is displayed on the liquid crystal unit 500. Units of game media used for games on the machine can be similarly displayed on the liquid crystal unit 500 . Also, if the game is played by the points system, the liquid crystal unit 500 may display "points" or "points", which are units of points, as in the above embodiment.

In addition, instead of managed gaming machines, for example, current gaming machines as unmanaged gaming machines, parrots, credit-type slot machines, etc. may be used as gaming machines according to the present invention, and gaming devices such as CU3 may The type of machine may be registered.

In addition, it is desirable that the gaming device such as CU3 can be commonly used for different types of gaming machines, but it is not necessary that it can be commonly used. may be used.

[8-2. Registration of game machine type]
In the above embodiment, the type of gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine provided corresponding to the gaming machine under management is determined based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the gaming machine under management, such as the setting "M1". Instead of registering, we will store model setting information, such as setting "M2" and "M3", sent from various management devices (information distribution server, ball management server, hall server, etc.) installed in the store. The type of corresponding gaming machine may be registered based on the external information.

Further, in the above embodiment, the type of the corresponding unmanaged gaming machine is registered in the gaming device (current card unit, lending machine, etc.) provided corresponding to the unmanaged gaming machine instead of the managed gaming machine. You may do so. However, in non-managed gaming machines, it is not designed to notify the game machine installation information from the managed gaming machine to the gaming device as described in the above embodiment. Based on external information such as gaming machine setting information and model setting information transmitted from devices (information distribution server, ball management server, hall server, etc.), the type of corresponding gaming machine may be registered.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game machine registration table 3245 in this case.
The table configuration of this game model registration table 3245 is similar to that of the game model registration table 3245 shown in FIG. 74, but the contents are partially different.

Specifically, in addition to “managed gaming machines”, “unmanaged gaming machines” are defined as game machine categories. It is Hereinafter, non-managed gaming machines will be described with specific examples.

(1) Setting No. “C1”
"Game machine setting information (information distribution server)" is defined in the registration information for each game machine category/game model. This means that, based on the gaming machine setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901, the gaming machine classification/game model is registered.
"Model setting information (information delivery server)" is defined in the model name registration information. This means that the model name is registered based on the model setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901 .
"Rate information (ball management server)" is defined in the lending rate registration information. This means that the lending rate is registered based on the rate information transmitted from the ball management server 902 .

(2) Setting No. “C2”
In the registration information for each game machine classification/game model, "boarding setting information (ball management server)" is defined. This means that the game machine classification/game model is registered based on the entry setting information transmitted from the ball management server 902 .
"Model setting information (information delivery server)" is defined in the model name registration information. This means that the model name is registered based on the model setting information transmitted from the information distribution server 901 .
The information for registration of the lending rate includes "boarding setting information (ball management server)". This means that the lending rate is registered based on the entry setting information transmitted from the ball management server 902 .

[8-3. External notification of counting information]
In the above-described embodiment, in principle, every time the count button is pressed once, the count information externally notified from the frame control board 17B to the CU3 with the counted game media count as the unit counted game media count α. explained as a thing. However, this need not necessarily be the case.

For example, the counting operation may be repeatedly executed in the gaming machine according to the length of time that the count button 28 is kept pressed in the gaming machine. In this case, in transmission pattern A shown in FIG. 71 and transmission pattern B shown in FIG. The count information external notification may be performed with the number of game media set as the unit count game media count α.

Also, when the counting button 28 is pressed once, regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether it is long pressed or not), all the number of game media currently possessed by the player is counted. good too. In this case, in transmission pattern A shown in FIG. 71 and transmission pattern B shown in FIG. The number of counted game media is externally notified for the number of times corresponding to the quotient (integer part) divided by the number of game media α, and then the number of counted game media is the remainder of the game media. It is sufficient to notify the count information externally.

For example, in a managed pachinko machine with a lending rate of 4 yen, if the total number of balls to be counted is "1100", the unit number of balls to be counted is set to 250, and the number of balls to be counted is counted at a transmission cycle of 300 [ms]. A total of five count information external notifications may be made, four times counting information external notification for 250 balls and one counting information external notification for counting the number of balls to be the remainder of 100 balls.

[8-4. Communication line disconnection detection]
In the above embodiment, in the transmission of inter-main-frame message data between the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B of the game machine, the main control board 16 and the frame control board 17B disconnect the communication line. You may make it detect.

When the main control board 16 detects the disconnection of the communication line, for example, within a first predetermined time (for example, 100 [ms] which is the same as the communication cycle) after transmitting the gaming machine information internal notification data to the frame control board 17B. When the game machine information internal response data is not received from the frame control board 17B, the game machine information internal notification data is retransmitted. At this time, the communication serial number is not updated (added by 1), and the same communication serial number is used. If the internal response data for the gaming machine information is not received even by resending the internal notification data for the gaming machine information, and the number of times the internal response data for the gaming machine information cannot be continuously received reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), communication is performed. Determined as line disconnection.

When the frame control board 17B detects the disconnection of the communication line, for example, after receiving the gaming machine information internal notification data from the main control board 16, the next gaming machine information If the internal notification data cannot be received, it is determined that the communication line is disconnected.

[8-5. drive in]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the ball management server 902 transmits entry setting information including the target area, game machine classification, game model type, lending rate, etc. to the CU3, and the CU3 receives the ball management server. It has been described that execution settings for various processes including the boarding process are made based on the boarding setting information received from 902 . However, this need not necessarily be the case.

As described in the fifth embodiment, the CU 3 identifies and registers the game machine category and game model of the corresponding game machine based on the game machine installation information (chip ID information, etc.) transmitted from the game machine. can do. For this reason, on the ball-handling management server 902 side, it is not necessary to manage the game machine category and game model of the game machine corresponding to each CU3. It is sufficient to manage the target area.

In this case, the CU3 notifies the ball management server 902 of the game machine category and game model registered based on the game machine installation information. Receiving this notification, the ball management server 902 transmits entry setting information including rate information and entry target area information of the gaming machine corresponding to the CU3 to the CU3. Then, CU3 may execute various processes related to boarding based on the boarding setting information received from the ball management server 902 .

Further, in the sixth embodiment, it is possible to mutually enter the managed pachinko machine (stored balls), which is the first managed gaming machine, and the managed slot machine (stored medals), which is the second managed gaming machine. However, the above-mentioned third managed gaming machine may be included in the managed gaming machines so that the first to third managed gaming machines can enter into each other regardless of the lending rate.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the type of game media to be used is limited to stored game media (balls/medals). Possessed game media (possessed balls/possessed medals) may be added.

[8-6. Relocation of CU]
As described in the fourth embodiment, there are cases where the CU3 is moved to the installation position of another gaming machine. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the CU 3 is transferred from one P machine 2 to another P machine 2 has been described as an example. That is, the case of transferring CU3 between managed gaming machines of the same type has been described as an example.

However, in the above-described fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the gaming machines are managed pachinko machines and managed slot machines. It is assumed that it will be transferred between gaming machines.

Therefore, here, the case of transferring CU3 between managed gaming machines of different types is considered. As an example, let us consider a case where CU3, which has been provided corresponding to the managed pachinko machine, is transferred and provided corresponding to the managed slot machine.

When the CU3 acquires a new unit number from the holder board of the unit holder at the transfer destination, the unit number 3237 stored in the CU storage unit 3231 is updated with the newly acquired unit number. Then, CU3 clears the game machine data stored in the game machine database 3238 of the CU storage unit 3231 and also clears the game information accumulation data stored in the game information accumulation database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231 . Also, the registration data stored in the unit setting registration data 3248 is cleared.

When CU3 is connected to the management slot machine of the relocation destination, it receives the gaming machine installation information external notification from the management slot machine. Then, CU3 identifies the type (managed slot machine) and model name of the managed gaming machine to be relocated based on the gaming machine installation information (chip ID information, etc.) included in the received gaming machine installation information external notification. In addition, it acquires rate information from the ball management server 902 or the like, and specifies the lending rate to be applied. Then, CU3 performs a game machine registration process for registering a new game machine, and stores the registration contents in the unit setting registration data 3248. FIG.

Next, CU3 acquires game information accumulation data including the latest game information accumulation value from the liquid crystal unit 500 attached to the management slot machine of the relocation destination, and stores it in the game information accumulation database 3239 of the CU storage unit 3231. .

This game information accumulated data is data containing the latest game information accumulated value in the management slot machine of the relocation destination. Therefore, the CU3 uses the latest gaming information cumulative value obtained from the liquid crystal unit 500 as reference information, and uses the gaming information count value included in the gaming information external notice received from the corresponding managed slot machine as the gaming information serving as reference information. Add to the cumulative value.

Then, as described in the above embodiment, CU3 executes information matching processing for matching information with the call lamp 1000, and matches game information between CU3 and the call lamp 1000. do it.

[8-7. consumption tax]
In the above embodiment, collection of consumption tax was not taken into consideration for the lending rate of game media, but collection of consumption tax may be taken into consideration. In this case, without changing the specifications of the current payment machine, the current payment machine can be used as it is. A managed pachinko machine with a lending rate of 4 yen has a unit lending ball count of "116 balls (500 yen)", and a managed slot machine with a lending rate of 20 yen has a unit lending medal count of "47 coins (1000 yen)". can be considered.

In this case, in the lending information external notification process executed by the CU3 described in the fifth embodiment, the number of unit lending game media with the consumption tax added is set as the unit number of lending game media β to the frame control board 17B. The lending information should be notified externally. In other words, in the managed pachinko machine (rental rate: 4 yen), the lending information is externally notified with the unit number of lent balls as "116 balls", and in the managed slot machine (lending rate: 20 yen), the unit lent medal number is set to "47". ” is sent to the outside of the rental information.

It is also possible to apply the above consumption tax collection to the entry described in the sixth embodiment. In this case, area information corresponding to the lending rate including the consumption tax is defined as area information in the target area setting table 9025 stored by the ball management server 902 . Specifically, the area information is defined as a lending rate of 4 yen → 4.32 yen, a lending rate of 1 yen → 1.08 yen, a lending rate of 20 yen → 21.6 yen, and a lending rate of 5 yen → 5.4 yen. You should leave it.

In addition, the possession ball management server 902 uses the above-mentioned loan rate that takes into account the consumption tax, from the number of game media that can be converted into game points before entering the area corresponding to the entry destination area, The number of game media that can be converted into game points is calculated, and the account information including the number of convertible game media is transmitted to CU3. Then, based on the number of convertible game media included in the received account information, CU3 displays the account information (the number of convertible game media before entry → the number of The number of game media) may be displayed.

[8-8. CU display section]
In the above-described embodiment, a display unit (hereinafter referred to as "CU display unit") is formed on the front of the CU3, and information corresponding to the game machine type and lending rate registered in the game machine registration process is displayed on this CU display unit. You may make it display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 92, for a managed pachinko machine with a lending rate of 4 yen, information such as ``Managed pachinko machine 500 yen lending 125 balls'' and ``Lent ball: 1 ball 4 yen'' is displayed on the CU display unit (see FIG. 92). 92 (A)), for a managed pachinko machine with a lending rate of 1 yen, information such as ``managed pachinko machine 200 yen lending 200 balls'' or ``rental ball: 1 ball 1 yen'' may be displayed on the CU display unit. (FIG. 92(B)).

Similarly, for a managed slot machine with a lending rate of 20 yen, information such as "Managed slot machine 1000 yen lending 50" and "Loan medal: 1 token 20 yen" is displayed on the CU display unit (Fig. 92(C)). For managed slot machines with a loan rate of 5 yen, information such as ``Managed slot machine 1000 yen loan 200 tokens'' or ``Loan medal: 1 token 5 yen'' may be displayed on the CU display unit (FIG. 92(D)). ).

2 P units 3 CU
16 Main control board 17 Payout control board 17B Frame control board 161 Main control unit 171 Payout control unit 171B Frame control unit 323 CU control unit 500 Liquid crystal unit 502 Liquid crystal unit control unit 900 Management computer 950 Distributor 1000 Call lamp 1200 Relay device

Claims (1)

A gaming device provided corresponding to a gaming machine,
It can be used in common for different types of gaming machines,
capable of communicating with a management device that manages information about gaming machines;
Equipped with registration means capable of registering the type of compatible gaming machine,
The registration means
Based on the information output from the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to acquire and register the type of the corresponding gaming machine from the management device ,
For gaming machines with different types of game media used for games, it is possible to acquire and register the corresponding gaming machine types from the management device.
A game device characterized by:

Images